GM Owner Manuals
2005 Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-23
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-44
Airbag System
......................................... 1-68
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-83
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-19
Mirrors .................................................... 2-41
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-50
HomeLink® Wireless Control System ........... 2-52
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-56
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-60
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-61
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-21
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-36
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-56
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-78
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-62
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
All-Wheel Drive
........................................ 5-47
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-48
Four-Wheel Drive
..................................... 5-49
Front Axle
............................................... 5-50
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-59
Tires
...................................................... 5-60
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-97
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-106
Electrical System
.................................... 5-107
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-116
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
names TAHOE and SUBURBAN are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in
the product after that time without notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if you
ever need it while you are on the road. If you sell the
vehicle, leave this manual with the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 05TAHOE B First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
©
2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-3
Manual Seats ................................................1-3
Power Seats ..................................................1-4
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-5
Heated Seats .................................................1-6
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6
Head Restraints .............................................1-8
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-8
60/40 Split Bench Seat ...................................1-9
50/50 Split Bench Seat ..................................1-11
Bench Seat ..................................................1-16
Bucket Seats ...............................................1-21
Safety Belts ...................................................1-23
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-23
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-28
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-28
Driver Position ..............................................1-29
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-36
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-37
Center Passenger Position .............................1-37
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-38
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-41
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-43
Child Restraints .............................................1-44
Older Children ..............................................1-44
Infants and Young Children ............................1-46
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-49
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-52
Top Strap ....................................................1-54
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-55
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-57
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ....................................1-59
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-59
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position ..........................1-61
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position ..........................1-63
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-64
1-1
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System ...............................................1-68
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-71
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-73
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-75
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-75
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-76
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-78
1-2
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-82
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-82
Restraint System Check ..................................1-83
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-83
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-84
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
If your vehicle has a manual bucket or a split bench
seat, you can adjust it with this lever located at the front
of the seat.
Lift the lever to unlock the seat. Using your body, slide
the seat to where you want it and release the lever.
Try to move the seat with your body to make sure the
seat is locked into place.
1-3
Power Seats
If your vehicle has a power seat, you can adjust it
with these controls located on the outboard sides of
the seats.
• Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by
raising or lowering the forward edge of the
horizontal control.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
whole horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by
raising or lowering the rear edge of the horizontal
control.
• Moving the whole horizontal control up or down
raises or lowers the entire seat cushion.
If your vehicle has power reclining seats, you can use
the vertical control to adjust the angle of the seatback.
Move the reclining front seatback rearward or forward
by moving the control toward the rear or the front of the
vehicle. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-6.
1-4
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle’s seats may be equipped with power
lumbar.
You can increase or
decrease lumbar support
in an area of the lower
seatback with this control,
located on the outboard
sides of the front seat(s).
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear of
the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower
seatback for more lateral support.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the bottom
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat on page 2-61 for more information.
1-5
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
If your vehicle has this
feature, the button used to
control the driver’s
heated seat is located on
the driver’s door panel.
The button used to control
the passenger’s heated
seat is located on the
passenger’s door panel.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button.
Press the button to cycle through the temperature
settings of high, medium, and low. The indicator light
will glow to indicate the level of heat selected.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with
the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the
button will glow to designate that only the seatback
is being heated.
The engine must be running for them to operate.
The heated front seats will be canceled after the ignition
is turned off. If you still want to use the heated front
seat feature after you restart your vehicle, you will need
to press the heated seat button again.
1-6
To adjust the front seatback, lift the manual lever
located on the outboard side of the seat. Release the
lever to lock the seatback where you want it. Lift
the lever again without pushing on the seatback and the
seatback will go to an upright position.
If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner,
see Power Seats on page 1-4 for further information on
how to operate the reclining seatback feature.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-7
Head Restraints
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seats
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
To raise the head restraint pull up on the head restraint.
Your vehicle may have rear seat head restraints that
can be adjusted up and down.
1-8
Extended models: The passenger’s side of the
second row 60/40 or rear bucket seats has an easy
entry feature. This makes it easy to get in and out of the
third seat, if your vehicle has one.
To operate the easy entry seat turn the release lever,
located on the back of the seat upward.
Tilt the seatback toward the front of the vehicle by
pulling the top of the seat forward. When you do the seat
bottom will release. Pull the seat forward until it stops.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger position
when finished. Push and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked in place.
60/40 Split Bench Seat
Make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat
and that the head restraints are completely lowered.
Tahoe models: The rear seat may have a 60/40 split
seat which may be folded down to give you more
cargo space.
On Tahoe models the rear seatbacks may be equipped
with rearward folding head restraints. When the
seatback is being folded down, the head restraint will
automatically fold rearward to allow a flat load floor
for cargo or entry to the third row seat (if equipped).
Extended models: The second row rear seat of
extended models may have a 60/40 split seat. Either
side of the rear seat my be folded down to provide
more cargo space.
Folding the Seatbacks
To fold, pull up on the
strap loop at the rear of
the seat cushion.
Then, pull the seat cushion
up and fold it forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-9
After folding the seat cushion fully forward, pull the
seatback forward and fold the seatback down until it is
flat. If the seatback cannot fold flat because it
interferes with the cushion, try moving the seat forward
and/or bring the front seatback more upright. On the
passenger side of the extended models, the lever at the
base of the seat must be turned rearward to release
the seatback.
To return the seat to the passenger position on a
extended model do the following:
1. Lift the floor load panels and latch them into the
seatback.
2. Lift the seatback up and push rearward all the way.
3. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into
position.
4. Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat
cushion to make sure the seat is securely in
place.
Make sure that the buckles on the driver’s side seatback
are accessible to the outboard and center occupant
and are not under the seat cushions.
On regular models make sure the head restraints are
returned to the upright position.
To create a load floor release the panels from the
seatback by pushing forward on the latch. Then fold the
panels back to cover the rear seat footwell area.
1-10
50/50 Split Bench Seat
If your vehicle has a 50/50 split bench, the seatback(s)
can be folded and the entire seat(s) tilted or removed
from the vehicles.
Folding the Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
To fold the seatbacks do the following:
• Pull up on the release lever, labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback, and push the seatback
forward.
• To return the seat to the passenger position, pull up
on the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on
the seatback until the seatback locks into the upright
position.
Push forward on the seatback to make sure it is locked
into position.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-11
Tilting the 50/50 Split Bench Seat
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
If the support rod is not properly engaged, the
folded third row seat could come loose in a
sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to people and damage to your vehicle. Always
be sure the support rod is properly engaged
when the third row seat is folded forward.
1-12
Once the third seatback has been folded down, the
entire seat can be tilted forward to create a flat
load floor. To do this, do the following:
1. Enter the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
2. Make sure the head restraints have been lowered
completely.
3. With the seat folded, unlatch the seat from the floor
by pulling up on the lever located under the
carrying handle at the rear of the seat labeled 2.
4. Lift the rear of the seat up, off the floor. You will not
be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the
seatback is folded down.
5. Tilt the seat fully forward and secure it in place
using the support rod located on the underside
of the seat on the passenger’s side. Make sure the
rod pin is fully engaged in the lock.
6. Push and pull on the seat. Make sure the support
rod is holding it firmly in place. Use the seat in this
position only when necessary for additional
cargo space.
To return the seat to the seating position do the
following:
1. Push forward on the seat and release the support
lock rod.
2. Secure the support rod in its stored position on the
underside of the seat.
3. Lower the seat to the floor and let the seat drop
into place.
4. Lift up on the carrying handle to make sure the seat
is locked in place.
5. Return the seatback to the upright position by
pulling up on the release lever labeled 1 before
the back can be folded upright.
Removing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat
To remove the 50/50 split bench seat, do the following:
1. Open the rear doors and enter the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback
forward onto the seat
cushion by using
the lever labeled 1.
The seat cannot
be removed unless the
seatback is folded.
6. Pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked
in place.
1-13
3. To unlatch the seat
from the floor, pull
up on the release lever
labeled 2,
located at the rear of
the seat, and lift
the rear of the seat up
off the floor.
Replacing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
4. Squeeze the release lever, located in the lower
middle to unlatch the seat from the floor, while
pulling the seat out.
{CAUTION:
5. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
1-14
To reinstall the 50/50 split bench, do the following:
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the front
wheels into the slots on the floor. The front latches
should lock into place. If the latches do not lock,
try tilting the rear of the seats upwards.
2. Once the latches are engaged, let the seat drop
into place. Release the lever labeled 1 to return
the seat to its upright position.
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
1-15
Bench Seat
If your vehicle has a full bench seat, the seatback can
be folded and the seat can be tilted or removed from the
vehicle.
Folding the Seatback
To fold the seatback on the bench seat, do the following:
1. Pull up on the release
lever, labeled 1,
located on the rear of
the seatback and
push the seatback
forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. To return the seat to an upright position, pull up on
the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the
seatback until the seatback locks into the upright
position.
Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is locked
into place.
1-16
Tilting the Bench Seat
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Once the third seatback has been folded down, the
entire seat can be tilted forward to create a flat
load floor. To do this, do the following:
1. Enter the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
2. Make sure the head restraints have been lowered
completely.
3. With the seat folded,
unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling
up on the lever located
under the carrying
handle at the rear of
the seat labeled 2.
{CAUTION:
If the support rod is not properly engaged, the
folded third row seat could come loose in a
sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to people and damage to your vehicle. Always
be sure the support rod is properly engaged
when the third row seat is folded forward.
4. Lift the rear of the seat up, off the floor. You will not
be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the
seatback is folded down.
1-17
5. Tilt the seat fully forward and secure it in place
using the support rod located on the underside
of the seat on the passenger’s side. Make sure the
rod pin is fully engaged in the lock.
6. Push and pull on the seat. Make sure the support
rod is holding it firmly in place. Use the seat in this
position only when necessary for additional
cargo space.
To return the seat to the seating position do the
following:
1. Push forward on the seat and release the support
lock rod.
2. Secure the support rod in its stored position on the
underside of the seat.
3. Lower the seat to the floor and let the seat drop
into place.
4. Lift up on the carrying handle to make sure the seat
is locked in place.
5. Return the seatback to the upright position by
pulling up on the release lever labeled 1 before
the back can be folded upright.
6. Pull the seatback forward to make sure it is locked
in place.
1-18
Removing the Bench Seat
To remove the full bench seat, do the following:
1. Open the rear doors and enter the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback
forward onto the seat
cushion by using
the lever labeled 1.
The seat cannot
be removed unless the
seatback is folded.
3. To unlatch the seat
from the floor, pull
up on the release lever
labeled 2,
located at the rear of
the seat, and lift
the rear of the seat up
off the floor.
4. Squeeze the release lever, located in the lower
middle to unlatch the seat from the floor while
pulling the seat out.
5. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
1-19
Replacing the Bench Seat
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To reinstall the full bench seat, do the following:
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
1-20
1. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the front
wheels into the slots on the floor. The front latches
should lock into place. If the latches do not lock,
try tilting the rear of the seats upwards.
2. Once the latches are engaged, let the seat drop
into place. Release the lever labeled 1 to return
the seat to its upright position.
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to
the floor.
Bucket Seats
If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks can be
reclined and the seats can be folded to give you
more cargo room.
Reclining the Seatbacks
On the extended models with bucket seats, the
seatbacks can be reclined. To adjust the seatback do
the following:
1. Pull forward the lever located at the base of
the seat.
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you
want it. If you pull the lever without pushing on the
seatback, the seatback will go to an upright
position.
Folding the Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
The seatbacks on the bucket seats may be folded
forward to give you more cargo space.
On extended models with rear bucket seats, the head
restraints need to be removed in order to fold the
rear seats. To do this follow these directions:
1. Lift the head restraints up until they stop.
2. Press in the button on the side of the head restraint
guide cap and lift up on the head restraint.
3. Do the same for the other cap.
1-21
The head restraint can be removed and stored in the
space provided in the folded up seat cushion.
To fold the seatbacks on the bucket seats, do the
following:
1. Pull up on the strap
loop located at the rear
of the seat cushion
and pull the seat
cushion up. Then fold
it forward.
2. Pull the seatback
release lever up and
pull the seatback
forward. Then fold it
until it is flat.
If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with
the cushion, try moving the front seat forward and/or
bringing the front seatback more upright.
1-22
Once the seatbacks are folded down, the rear seat
footwell area will be exposed and will have to be
covered by the load floor panel. To create a load floor,
do the following:
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
1. Release the panels from the seatbacks by pushing
forward on the latches.
2. Then fold the panels back to cover the rear seat
footwell area.
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
If you have removed the head restraints to fold the rear
bucket seat, be sure to reinstall them on the seatback
after it has been returned to the normal seating position.
1-23
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-39.
1-24
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-25
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-26
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-27
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-44
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-46. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
1-28
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-43.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-29
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-30
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-31
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-32
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-33
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-34
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-35
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-36
Right Front Passenger Position
Lap Belt
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-29.
When you sit in a center seating position, other than in
the second row, you have a lap belt.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature which may turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag. If this happens unintentionally, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
Center Passenger Position
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone
can sit in the center positions.
When you sit in the center seating position in the
second row you have a lap-shoulder belt which is similar
to the belt in the rear outside seating positions. To
learn how to wear this belt see “Lap-Shoulder Belt”
under Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-38.
A lap safety belt does not have a retractor. To make the
belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-37
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-43.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
1-38
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
The positions next to the windows have
lap-shoulder belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-43.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-39
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
1-40
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the trim panel near the side of
the seatback or from the side of the center seat.
For the third row, remove the guide from its storage
clip on the side of the seatback.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-41
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
1-42
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-38.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Make sure you remove the comfort guide
from the belt before you fold a rear seat down or use an
easy-entry seat, if your vehicle has one.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
1-43
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seat that
has a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-44
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
{CAUTION:
move the child toward the center of the vehicle. If
the child is sitting in the second row center position,
move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In
either case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on
the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s
upper body would have the restraint that belts
provide. See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults on page 1-41. If the child
is so small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to
place the child a seat that has a lap belt, if your
vehicle has one.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-45
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-46
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-47
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-48
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-49
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-50
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-51
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle – even when no child is in it.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
CAUTION:
1-52
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right
front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.
It is always better to secure a child restraint in
the rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
1-53
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always to
be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that
the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the top
strap under it.
1-54
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Suburban
A child restraint with a top strap should only be used in
the second or third row.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position or the third row outboard seating
positions if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored. There is no place to anchor the top strap
in these positions.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Suburban Second Row Seat (Bucket Seats Similar)
1-55
Tahoe
A child restraint with a top strap should only be used in
the second or third row.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position or the third row driver’s-side and
center seating positions if a national or local law requires
that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored. There is no place to anchor the
top strap in these positions.
Suburban Third Row Seat
A top strap anchor is located at the bottom rear of the
seat cushion for each seating position in the second row,
and for the center seating position in the third row.
Tahoe Second Row Seat
1-56
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
Tahoe Third Row Seat
A top strap anchor is located at the bottom rear of the
seat cushion for each seating position in the second row
and in the outboard passenger-side seating position
in the third row.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. There are anchors
for the center and right side passenger second row
seating positions for bench seats, and the outboard
passenger positions for bucket seats.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-57
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the
LATCH system has visible metal anchors in the seat
where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
{CAUTION:
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-58
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-57.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-57. See Top Strap
on page 1-54 if the child restraint has one.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-54.
For the third row, if your vehicle has a bench seat, there
are no top strap anchors in the outboard seating
positions. If your vehicle has a 50/50 split bench seat in
the third row, there is no top strap anchor in the
driver-side seating position. Do not secure a child
restraint in these positions if a national or local
law requires that the top strap be anchored or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that the
top strap must be anchored.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-59
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-60
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position
Second Row
The center seat position in the second row has a
lap-shoulder belt which works the same way as the
safety belt in the rear outside seat positions. For
instructions on how to secure a child restraint using a
lap-shoulder belt see, Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-59.
Third Row
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-57. See Top Strap
on page 1-54 if the child restraint has one.
If your vehicle has 50/50 split bench seat in the third
row, there is no top strap anchor in the center seating
position. Do not secure a child restraint in this position if
a national or local law requires that the top strap be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-61
The center seat position in the third row has a lap belt.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-62
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right
front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.
It is always better to secure a child restraint in
the rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in this position. The restraints
will not work properly.
1-63
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-52.
In addition, your vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat
or a small child in a forward-facing child restraint or
booster seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-78 and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-40 for more information on
this including important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-64
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-4 or Manual
Seats on page 1-3.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-57.
There is no top strap anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position
if a national or local law requires that the top strap be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
See Top Strap on page 1-54 if your child restraint
has one.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-78. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See Power Seats on page 1-4 or Manual
Seats on page 1-3.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-40.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-65
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-66
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and the airbag is off, the off indicator in the rearview
mirror will be lit and stay lit when the key is
turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-67
Airbag System
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Your vehicle has airbags — a frontal airbag for the
driver and another frontal airbag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have side impact
airbags. Side impact airbags are available for the driver
and right front passenger.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and/or the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG will
appear on the airbag covering on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
airbags have provided in the past.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
1-68
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Side impact airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to inflate only in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Front
occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door.
1-69
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-44 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-46.
1-70
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-39
for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-71
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-72
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side
impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block
the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate and a more severe frontal impact. For
moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level
less than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
1-73
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph
(16 to 25 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 20 to 30 mph (32 to 48 km/h).
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.)
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a
different crash speed than if the object does not
deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
1-74
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
Vehicles with dual stage airbags are also equipped with
special sensors which enable the sensing system to
monitor the position of both the driver and passenger
front seats. The seat position sensor provides
information which is used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact
airbag. See Airbag System on page 1-68. Side impact
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe
side crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not designed to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts, because inflation would not likely help the
occupant. A side impact airbag will only deploy on the
side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road
Driving on page 4-22 for tips on off-road driving.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal airbag modules
are located inside the steering wheel and instrument
panel. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the airbag
modules are located in the seatback closest to the
driver’s and/or right front passenger’s door.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact airbag.
1-75
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the side of
the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing
or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
1-76
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them, the air
bag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback, the airbag may not work properly. You
may have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, or both the airbag module and seatback for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s side
impact airbag. Do not open or break the airbag
coverings.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-9.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
1-77
Passenger Sensing System
If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured
in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a
passenger sensing system. The indicator will be visible
when you turn your ignition key to START or RUN.
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible on the rearview mirror during the system
check. When the system check is complete, either
the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-40. If your rearview
mirror does not have either of the indicators pictured,
then your vehicle does not have the passenger sensing
system.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
1-78
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-64.
1-79
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
1-80
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-39 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-82 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-81
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are airbag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate
while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer
and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-82
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 7-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my advanced airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
of the advanced airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-83
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
1-84
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-6
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-13
Lockout Protection ........................................2-13
Liftgate ........................................................2-14
Windows ........................................................2-15
Manual Windows ..........................................2-15
Power Windows ............................................2-16
Sun Visors ...................................................2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-17
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-17
Passlock® ....................................................2-19
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle ...............................................2-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-20
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-21
Starting the Engine .......................................2-21
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-22
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-24
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-27
Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-28
All-Wheel Drive with StabiliTrak® .....................2-32
Parking Brake ..............................................2-35
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-36
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-38
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-38
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-39
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-40
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Mirrors ...........................................................2-41
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-41
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ....................................................2-41
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-43
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-46
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors .........................2-46
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-47
Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror .................2-47
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .....................2-48
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-48
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors ....................2-49
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-49
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-49
2-2
OnStar® System .............................................2-50
HomeLink® Wireless Control System ...............2-52
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
Operation .................................................2-53
Storage Areas ................................................2-56
Glove Box ...................................................2-56
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-56
Front Storage Area .......................................2-56
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-57
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-57
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-58
Convenience Net ..........................................2-58
Cargo Cover ................................................2-59
Sunroof .........................................................2-60
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-61
Memory Seat ...............................................2-61
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
The children or others could be badly injured
or even killed. Do not leave the keys in a
vehicle with children.
2-3
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door
locks as well as the spare
tire hoist lock, if equipped.
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
2-4
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6. If your vehicle is
equipped with the OnStar® system with an active
subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle,
OnStar® may be able to send a command to unlock
your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-50
for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-6.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet
(1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
K (Unlock): Press this
button once to unlock
the driver’s door.
The interior lamps will
come on. Pressing
unlock again within
three seconds will
cause the remaining
doors to unlock.
You can choose different feedback options for each
press of the unlock button. See “Lock Feedback” and
“Unlock Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-72 for more information.
2-6
Q (Lock):
Press this button once to lock all of the
doors. Pressing lock again within three seconds
may cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation. You
can choose different feedback options for each press
of the lock button. See “Lock Feedback” and “Unlock
Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 3-72 for more information.
L (Panic): Press this button to sound the horn and
flash the headlamps and taillamps for up to 30 seconds.
Panic can be turned off by pressing the button again,
by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded
the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,
do the following:
1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, in the slot
between the covers of the transmitter housing
near the key ring hole. Remove the bottom
by twisting the coin.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery,
positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter. See
“Resynchronization” following this information.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this system. The transmitter
does not send the same signal twice to the receiver.
The receiver will not respond to a signal that has been
sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording
and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the lock and unlock
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for
15 seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
2-8
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the keyless entry system, if equipped,
or you can also use your key.
To lock the door from
the inside, slide the
lever rearward.
To unlock the door,
slide the lever forward.
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle is equipped
with power door locks,
press the raised side of
the switch, with the
lock symbol, on either
front door to lock all the
doors at once.
Press the recessed side of the switch with the unlock
symbol, to unlock all the doors at once.
If your vehicle has the delayed locking feature, see
“Delayed Locking” later in this section.
2-9
If your vehicle has this
power door lock switch,
press the bottom of
the switch on either front
door to lock all the doors
at once.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate is
open, the delayed locking feature will delay locking
the doors until five seconds after the last door is closed.
You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed
locking feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button
on the keyless entry transmitter twice will override the
delayed locking feature and immediately lock all
the doors.
Press the top of the switch to unlock all the doors
at once.
The power door locks will operate at any time even
when the ignition is off.
Operating the power locks may interact with the
theft-deterrent system (if equipped). See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17.
2-10
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on
again by doing the following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
2. Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can also program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Door Lock Delay” under
DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-72.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method.
Programmable Locking Feature
Following are the two available programming options:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
into gear.
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission
is shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the two programming options
listed above before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30 second program timer will begin. You are now
ready to program the automatic door locks.
3. Select one of the two programming options listed
previously, and press the lock side of the power
door lock switch to cycle through the lock options.
You will have 30 seconds to begin programming.
If you exceed the 30 second limit, the locks will
automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp
twice to indicate that you have left the program
mode. If this occurs, repeat the procedure beginning
with Step 1 to re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not
be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-11
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed
at the factory to unlock the driver’s door once the
transmission is shifted to PARK (P). The following
instructions detail how to program your door locks
differently than the factory setting. Choose one of the
four programming options listed above before entering
the program mode.
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2-12
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the four programming options
listed previously, and press the unlock side of
the power door lock switch to cycle through the
unlocking options. You will have 30 seconds
to begin programming. If you exceed the 30-second
limit, the locks will automatically lock and unlock
and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you have left the program mode. If this occurs,
repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1
to re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you
are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not be
modified.
See your dealer for more information.
Rear Door Security Locks
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can
lock the rear side doors so they cannot be opened
from the inside by passengers.
This feature is located
on the inside edge of
the rear doors.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open the rear door while the security lock is engaged,
unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
To use one of the locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. To engage the rear door security locks, move the
lever forward.
3. To disengage the lock, move the lever rearward.
4. Close the door.
5. Do the same thing to the other rear door.
2-13
Liftgate
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
glass, liftgate or rear doors open because
carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate glass,
liftgate, or rear doors open, or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body and the
liftgate glass, liftgate, or rear doors:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
setting on VENT or OUTSIDE AIR. That will
force outside air into your vehicle. See
Climate Control System on page 3-21.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-39.
2-14
Liftgate Glass and Liftgate
To open a mechanical lock system from the outside,
insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise
to unlock the glass and liftgate.
The liftgate glass can be opened using the button on
the liftgate after the doors have been unlocked. This can
be done by using either the power door locks or the
remote keyless entry system.
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the door.
To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert
the key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors
will lock. You may also use the keyless entry system
or the power door locks to lock the liftgate and
liftgate glass.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or
lower the manual windows.
2-15
Power Windows
Express-Down Windows
If you have power windows, the controls are located on
each of the side doors.
The driver and front passenger windows have an
express-down feature that allows the windows to be
lowered without holding the switch. Press down fully
on the window switch, then release, to activate the
express-down mode. The express-down mode can be
canceled at any time by pulling up on the switch.
To open the window in small amounts, press the
switch to the first position until the window is at the
desired level.
Window Lockout
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger and
rear windows as well. Your power windows will
work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY
or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-21.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up the front edge of the switch to raise the window.
2-16
o (Window Lockout): The window lockout switch
is located in front of the power window switches on
the driver’s door armrest. This feature prevents
all passenger windows from operating, except from
the driver’s position. To engage the lockout feature
press the switch, and an indicator light will illuminate.
To disengage the feature, press the switch again
and the indicator light will go off.
Sun Visors
The security light, located
on the instrument panel
cluster, will flash as
you open the door, while
the ignition is off, to
indicate the system is
being activated.
To block out glare, swing down the top and bottom
visors, if equipped. You can swing the bottom visor to
cover the side window. The visors also slide along
the rod to cover the different areas of the front window.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
If equipped, pull the sun visor down and lift the
mirror cover to turn on the lamps.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may be equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
This message reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here is how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should come on and flash. If using the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the door does
not need to be open.
If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm
will not be activated until all doors are closed
and the security light goes off.
3. Close all doors. The security light will stop flashing
and go off after approximately 30 seconds. The
content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the
security light goes off.
2-17
If a door is opened without using the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your
vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for
about two minutes, then will turn off to save the
battery power.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if you lock
the doors with a key or use the manual door lock.
It activates only if you use a power door lock switch
with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that you
can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if
the alarm has been set off.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm if the system
has been armed.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by
placing the key in the ignition and turning it to start.
2-18
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open,
or with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the
door with the manual door lock and open the
door. This should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the
fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-107.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, see your dealer for service.
Passlock®
®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock®
at this time. You may also want to check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-107.
See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow,
for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make
full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-67 for more information.
2-19
Ignition Positions
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only
with your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.
If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while
you turn the key hard. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as
the radio in the accessory ignition position may
drain the battery and prevent your vehicle from
starting. Do not operate your vehicle in the
accessory ignition position for a long period
of time.
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
2-20
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain
features on your vehicle to continue to work up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof (if equipped), and
OnStar® System (if equipped) will work when the ignition
key is in RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is
turned from RUN to LOCK, these features will continue
to work for up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with Starter Motor Control.
This feature assists in starting the engine and protects
the electrical system. This feature may cause the
engine to crank even after the ignition key is not
in START.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will disengage the starter
motor, cause your battery to be drained much
sooner, and add excessive heat that can damage
your starter motor. Try not to hold the key in
START for longer than 15 seconds and wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while
you hold the ignition key in START. When
the engine starts, let go of the key and let up
on the accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try.
2-21
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START and hold it there up
to 15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go
of the key.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
2-22
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can
change the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since
the pedals can not move farther away from the standard
position, but can move toward the driver for better
pedal reach.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
The switch used to
adjust the pedals is
located on the driver’s
side door panel.
Press the arrow at the end of the switch closest to you
to move the pedals closer to your body. Press the
arrow at the far end of the switch to move the pedals
away from your body.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have
an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord.
This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the power steering fluid
reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2-23
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission
and features an electronic shift position indicator
within the instrument panel cluster. This display must
be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of
being moved out of PARK (P).
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start your
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-24
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-36. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-67.
{CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll — even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel
high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) — not in
NEUTRAL. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-36.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or
Snow on page 4-50.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your two-wheel drive vehicle
is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-25
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
2-26
If you manually select SECOND (2) in a light duty
automatic transmission, the transmission will drive in
second gear. You may use this feature for reducing the
speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle
is moving forward, the transmission will not shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on
a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder, your
transmission is designed to shift differently until the
engine reaches normal operating temperature. This is
intended to improve heater performance.
Tow/Haul Mode
When Tow/Haul mode is
selected the Tow/Haul
indicator light will
illuminate.
The Tow/Haul mode also interacts with the Autoride®
feature, if equipped, to enhance the ride when trailering
or with a loaded vehicle. See Autoride® on page 4-66.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tow/Haul mode.
If so, the selector button is located on the end of
the column shift lever. You can use this feature to assist
when towing or hauling a heavy load. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-67 for more information.
2-27
Four-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you will see the
buttons shown below. You can send your engine’s
driving power to all four wheels for extra traction.
To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel drive,
you must be familiar with its operation. Read the part
that follows before using four-wheel drive.
Automatic Transfer Case
The transfer case buttons
are located to the left of
the instrument panel
cluster.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
four-wheel drive for an extended period of time may
cause premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain.
Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in four-wheel
drive for extended periods of time.
Front Axle Locking Feature
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when
you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to
lock or unlock is normal.
For four-wheel drive vehicles with StabiliTrak®,
see StabiliTrak® System on page 4-11.
Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
You can choose among four driving settings:
AUTO 4WD (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive):
This setting is ideal for use when road surface traction
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in
AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s
power is sent only to the rear wheels. When the
vehicle senses a loss of traction, the system will
automatically engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this
mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than
Two-Wheel High.
2-28
2 m(Two Wheel-High): This setting is used for driving
in most street and highway situations. Your front axle
is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting also
provides the best fuel economy.
4 m(Four Wheel-High): Use the four-wheel high
position when you need extra traction, such as on snowy
or icy roads or in most off-road situations. This setting
also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle.
This is the best setting to use when plowing snow.
4 n (Four Wheel-Low): This setting also engages your
front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never need
this setting. It sends maximum power to all four wheels.
You might choose Four Wheel-Low if you are driving
off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, and while
climbing or descending steep hills. StabiliTrak® will not
engage in this mode. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-11 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is
in PARK (P). You or someone else could be
seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on page 2-35.
NEUTRAL (N): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case
to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.
See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-62 or
Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-62 for more information.
Indicator lights in the button show which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you
turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights
do not come on, you should take your vehicle to your
dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while
shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when
the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer
case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the
last chosen setting.
If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
4WD message” under Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-56.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel High or
AUTO 4WD (Automatic Four Wheel Drive)
Press and release the Four-Wheel High or AUTO
4WD button. This can be done at any speed, except
when shifting from Four Wheel-Low, and the indicator
light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when
the shift is completed.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel High
Press and release the Two-Wheel High button.
This can be done at any speed, except when shifting
from Four-Wheel Low.
2-29
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Low
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Low
To shift to the Four-Wheel Low position, the ignition
must be in RUN and the vehicle must be stopped
or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method
for shifting into four-wheel low is to have your vehicle
moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release
the Four-Wheel Low button. You must wait for the
four-wheel low indicator light to stop flashing and remain
on before shifting your transmission in gear.
To shift from Four-Wheel Low to Four-Wheel High,
AUTO 4WD or Two-Wheel High, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in
RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of
Four-Wheel Low is to have your vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the
Four-Wheel High, AUTO 4WD or Two-Wheel High
button. You must wait for the Four-Wheel High,
AUTO 4WD or Two-Wheel High indicator light to stop
flashing and remain on before shifting your transmission
into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Low indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To
help avoid damaging your vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stop flashing
before shifting the transmission into gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel Low and Four-Wheel High ranges or from
NEUTRAL with the engine running.
If the Four-Wheel High, AUTO 4WD or Two Wheel High
switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or
moving, the Four-Wheel High, AUTO 4WD or Two-Wheel
High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not
complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than
3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Low indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To
help avoid damaging your vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stop flashing
before shifting the transmission into gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel Low and Four-Wheel High ranges or from
NEUTRAL with the engine running.
If the Four-Wheel Low button is pressed when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel Low
indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete
the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than
3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
After 30 seconds the transfer case will shift to
Four-Wheel High mode.
2-30
Shifting into NEUTRAL
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following:
To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn
the ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.
6. Simultaneously press and hold the Two-Wheel High
and Four-Wheel Low buttons for 10 seconds. The
NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case
shift to NEUTRAL is complete.
7. If the engine is running, verify that the transmission
is in NEUTRAL (N) by shifting the transmission to
REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift the
transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second.
8. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, which will turn
the engine off.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case
shift position (Two-Wheel High, Four-Wheel
High, AUTO 4WD, or Four-Wheel Low).
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the NEUTRAL light will go out.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
desired position.
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of
the different modes may cause the transfer case to
enter the shift protection mode. This will protect
the transfer case from possible damage and will
only allow the transfer case to respond to one shift
per 10 seconds. The transfer case may stay in this
mode for up to three minutes.
2-31
All-Wheel Drive with StabiliTrak®
The three modes you can choose between are:
If your vehicle has this system, you will see the buttons
shown below. With this system, engine power is sent
to all four wheels when you select the AWD button.
d (StabiliTrak®):
The transfer case buttons
are located to the left of
the instrument panel
cluster. Use these buttons
to shift between the
various modes of
four-wheel drive.
All-wheel drive is like four-wheel drive, but there is
no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the
front axle. It is fully automatic, and when combined
with StabiliTrak®, the all-wheel drive system adjusts itself
as needed for road conditions.
2-32
This button is used to enable or
disable the StabiliTrak® and is also used to shift
the transfer case into Neutral (N). For more information
on using StabiliTrak®, see StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-11.
f (All-Wheel Drive):
This button allows the transfer
case to distribute power to all four wheels as needed
depending on road and driving conditions.
4 n (4LO): This button allows the transfer case to
deliver extra torque to the wheels, and provides
for precise control of wheel speed by engine braking.
You may never need this setting. It sends maximum
power to all four wheels. You might choose four-wheel
low if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep
mud, deep snow, and while climbing or descending
steep hills.
Shifting Into Four Wheel Low
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on
page 2-35.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-62 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-62 for more information.
Indicator lights in the buttons show which mode you are
in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn
on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not
come on, you should take your vehicle to your dealer for
service. An indicator light will flash while the transfer case
is shifting. It will remain on when the shift is complete.
If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a
requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. See
SERVICE 4WD under Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-56.
To shift to the Four-Wheel Low position, the ignition
must be in RUN and the vehicle must be stopped
or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N). Press and release the
Four-Wheel Low switch. You must wait for the
Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stop flashing and
remain on before shifting your transmission in gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Low indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To
help avoid damaging your vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stop flashing
before shifting the transmission into gear.
If the Four-Wheel Low button is pressed when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel Low
indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete
the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than
3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
After 30 seconds, the transfer case will return to the
setting last chosen.
When in Four-Wheel Low, StabiliTrak® is automatically
disabled. For more information see StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-11.
2-33
Shifting Out of Four Wheel-Low
To shift from Four-Wheel Low to All-Wheel Drive,
your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N)
and the ignition in RUN. Press and release the all-wheel
drive button. You must wait for the All-Wheel Drive
indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated
before shifting your transmission into gear.
If the All-Wheel Drive button is pressed when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the All-Wheel Drive
indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not
complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL (N).
6. Simultaneously press and hold the StabiliTrak®
and four-wheel low buttons for 10 seconds. The
red NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer
case shift to NEUTRAL is complete.
7. If the engine is running, verify that the transmission
is in NEUTRAL (N) by shifting the transmission to
REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift the
transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second.
8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following:
Shifting Into NEUTRAL
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, do the following:
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to RUN with the engine off.
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (All-Wheel Drive or Four-Wheel Low).
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the NEUTRAL light will go out.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Release the parking brake.
5. Shift the transfer case to All-Wheel Drive.
6. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
desired position.
2-34
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash when
the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at
least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least three seconds.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-67.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
2-35
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. With
four-wheel drive, if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-67.
2-36
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position by
pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up
as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle could
move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be
free to roll, even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P). So be sure the transfer case is in
a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running unless
you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
was not fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking
pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to
pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called
“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking
brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you
leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting
Into Park (P) on page 2-36.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-37
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Automatic Transmission
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P)
when the ignition is in the LOCK position. You have
to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-24.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY. There is no shift
interlock in this key position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-38
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
(Continued)
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down
to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
2-39
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-39.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-45.
2-40
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer
case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-36.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-67.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the bottom
of the mirror. See OnStar® System on page 2-50 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
P (On/Off):
This is the on/off button.
Mirrors
Temperature and Compass Display
Manual Rearview Mirror
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the compass/temperature display on or off.
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you for normal daytime operation.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, the
automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner
of the mirror face that shows the compass reading
and the outside temperature.
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to be
calibrated. For more information, see “Compass
Calibration” following.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be
locked in and the compass/temperature display
will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please see your GM dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
2-41
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started.
To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the
following:
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to the
left of the on/off button, is lit. If it is not, press and
hold the on/off button for approximately six seconds
until the green light comes on, indicating that the
mirror is in automatic dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function
by pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds, until the green indicator
light turns off.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic
north and true geographic north. If not adjusted
to account for compass variance, the compass could
give false readings.
2-42
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release
the button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described next.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Passenger Airbag Indicator
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
For more information, see Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-78 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-40.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature.
When on, an automatic dimming mirror will dim to
the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper
right corner of the mirror with the compass reading and
the outside temperature. The display can be turned
on or off by briefly pressing either the TEMP or
the COMP button.
2-43
Temperature Display
Compass Operation
The temperature can be displayed by pressing
the TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once
briefly, will toggle the temperature reading on and off.
To alternate the temperature reading between
Fahrenheit and Celsius, press and hold the TEMP
button for approximately four seconds until the
display blinks F and C. Press and release the TEMP
button to toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius
readings. After approximately four seconds of inactivity,
the display will stop blinking and display the last
selection made.
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
Press and release the TEMP button to toggle the
temperature display between Fahrenheit or Celsius.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, please consult your
GM dealer.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press and hold the TEMP button for approximately eight
seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on or
off. The indicator light to the left of the TEMP button will
turn on or off to indicate when the feature is on. Once
the mirror is turned off, it will remain off until it is turned
back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
2-44
When the ignition is started and the compass feature
is on, the compass will show two character boxes
for approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the compass heading.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic
north and true geographic north. If not adjusted
to account for compass variance, your compass could
give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-45
Passenger Airbag Indicator
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors
The mirror may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display the
word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-78 for more information.
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Outside Manual Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the
side of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects
behind you. The mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow areas.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on
convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror
performance.
2-46
If your vehicle is equipped with camper-type mirrors,
they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view
of the objects behind you.
Pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with power outside mirrors,
the controls are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror
If your vehicle is equipped with outside power
camper-type mirrors, they can be adjusted so you
can have a clear view of objects behind you.
To extend the mirrors move the selector switch, located
above the mirror control, to the middle position. The
mirror control will illuminate. Press the left side of
the mirror control to slide the mirror heads away from
the body of the vehicle. Press the right side of the mirror
control to slide the mirror heads toward the body of
the vehicle.
Move the selector switch located above the control pad
to the left or right to choose the mirror you want to
adjust, then press the dots located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror.
2-47
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with this feature, the
controls are located on the
driver’s door armrest.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See
“Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if
the following occurs:
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
Move the upper selector switch to the left or right to
choose the mirror you want to adjust; then press
the dots located on the four-way control pad to adjust
the mirror.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
them at least three times using the mirror controls.
This will reset them to their normal position.
The mirrors may also include a memory function
which works together with the memory seats. See
Memory Seat on page 2-61 for more information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
To fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch,
located above the mirror control, to the middle
position. The mirror control will illuminate. Press the
right or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold
the mirrors. You may notice the mirror glass adjust
as the mirrors fold in; this is normal. The mirror glass
will reposition itself once the mirrors are unfolded.
2-48
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, the
driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by
the on and off settings found on the electrochromic
mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display on page 2-43.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
If the vehicle has the memory package, the outside
mirrors are able to perform the curb view assist mirror
function. This feature will cause the passenger’s
and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This feature may
be useful in allowing the driver to view the curb when
parallel parking. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R) and a short delay has occurred,
the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will return to its
original position.
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
To change the preselected tilt position, adjust the
mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory
as the tilt position.
This feature can be turned on or off through the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
The vehicle may have outside heated mirrors which
help clear them of condensation, snow, and ice.
When the rear window defogger button is pressed, the
heated mirrors are also turned on. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Control System
on page 3-25 or Dual Climate Control System on
page 3-22 for more information.
2-49
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com
or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.
®
OnStar Services
®
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar , the Safe
and Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can
extend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs.
For more information, press the OnStar® button to speak
with an advisor.
2-50
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
•
•
•
•
All Safe and Sound Plan Services
Driving Directions
RideAssist
Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is an available hands-free wireless phone
that is integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed
nationwide using simple voice commands with no
additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,
refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;
or speak to an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
If your vehicle has this feature, steering wheel controls
can be used to interact with the OnStar® personal
calling feature.
Press the control with
this symbol on the
steering wheel to make
a phone call.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment, and more. Customize
your information profile at www.myonstar.com. See the
OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directory
numbers, press the control, say the number(s), then
say “dial.”
See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
2-51
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System
HomeLink® a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three hand-held
transmitters used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the Internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
2-52
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System Operation
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on
the Internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Programming HomeLink®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
2-53
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed
and released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
2-54
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.”
You do not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase
all previous programming.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to “time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink® ” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal
has been successfully accepted by HomeLink®.
The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” to complete.
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for
at least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and
can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” following this section.
2-55
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
Storage Areas
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
Glove Box
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section.
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®
at 1-800-355-3515, or on the Internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-56
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle
upward.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have cupholders located in the front
and rear floor console or in the fold down armrest, and in
the quarter trim.
Front Storage Area
Your vehicle may be equipped with a center armrest
storage compartment in the front bench seat.
To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latch
handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let the
lid pop up and swing open.
The storage compartment may have a cassette/compact
disc holder.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a console compartment with
cupholders between the bucket seats.
To open it, press the button and swing the console
lid open.
The rear of the console has a cupholder that swings
down for the rear seat passenger to use.
Luggage Carrier
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on
top of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached to
the roof and crossrails which can be moved back
and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the
siderails or siderail supports.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-52.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, place
the load in the area over the rear wheels (behind
the rear side door on extended models). If you
need to, cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside
the crossrails and siderails to spread the load.
If plywood is used, tie it to the siderail supports.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding.
To move the crossrails, pull out on the latch release
handle at each end. Slide the crossrail to the desired
position balancing the force side to side. Push the
release handle back into the latched position and
slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure
the latch snaps securely into place.
• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. Also
tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so
tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely locked
into the siderail.
2-57
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the glass or above the rear
load doors.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
If your vehicle has the Z71 option, your vehicle’s
luggage carrier has a roller crossrail at the rear of
the vehicle.
To load cargo, place cargo on the roller and roll the
cargo forward onto the two front crossrails.
To move the crossrails do the following:
1. Loosen the thumbscrew at each end.
2. Move crossrail to desired position.
3. Tighten the thumbscrews.
Make sure the crossrail is secured.
Rear Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located
in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the driver’s
side trim panel.
To open the utility compartment, press in on the release
latch and swing the compartment door open.
To open the compartment on extended models, pull the
latch to access.
Convenience Net
The convenience net (if equipped) in the rear of your
vehicle helps to keep small loads in place during sharp
turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.
To install the net, attach the hooks to the raised cargo
tie downs. Then, attach the cord loops to the button
retainers in the side trim.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
2-58
Cargo Cover
To remove the cover from the vehicle, do the following:
1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you
put it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
If you have a cargo cover, you can use it to cover items
in the cargo area of your vehicle.
To use the cover, do the following:
1. Pull the cover handle toward the rear of the vehicle.
2. Latch the cover posts into the retaining sockets
on the cargo area trim panels.
To return the cover to the retracted position, do the
following:
1. Pull up on the cover handle to release the cover
posts from the retaining sockets.
2. Then, grasping the passenger’s side cover endcap,
push the cover endcap toward the driver’s side of
the vehicle. The endcap should lock in the
compressed position.
3. Lift the cover up on the passenger’s side, swing the
cover rearward and take it out of the vehicle.
To put the cover in the vehicle, do the following:
1. Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces
rearward with the round surface facing down.
2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and place the
cover holder tab into the slot in the driver’s side
trim panel.
3. Move the other end of the cover forward and hold it
next to the passenger’s side trim panel slot.
4. Push the button on top of the passenger’s side
endcap. This will allow the cover to extend into
the trim slot.
5. Lightly pull on the cover holder to make sure it is
secure.
On some models there are two slots. The slots
furthest forward allow the cover to be used if the
third seat is removed or folded down.
2. Let the cover move forward to the full retracted
position.
2-59
Sunroof
Cargo Tie Downs
Your vehicle may be
equipped with cargo tie
downs in the rear
cargo area that allow
you to strap cargo in
and keep it from moving
inside the vehicle.
When not using the tie downs, flip them down out
of the way.
2-60
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition
needs to be on or RAP needs to be active. See
“Retained Accessory Power” under Ignition Positions
on page 2-20.
Press and release the rear side of the button located in
the front overhead console to express-open the glass
panel and sunshade. To stop the express-open motion,
press the front or rear of the button again. To close
the glass panel, press and hold the front of the button.
The glass will not be fully seated unless the button
is held until the glass stops moving. With the sunroof
closed, press the forward side of the button to open the
sunroof to the vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which
you can pull forward to block sun rays.
Vehicle Personalization
If a hand, arm, or other object is blocking the sunroof
glass panel as it is closing, the glass panel will stop
at the obstruction. After the obstruction is removed,
the glass panel can be closed or opened.
Memory Seat
Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periods
of time as debris may collect in the tracks.
If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or is
not working, you may need to reprogram the sunroof.
To do this, start the vehicle and press the forward
side of the sunroof button until the glass panel moves
to a fully closed position. Release, and press again
to move to the vent position, which occurs when
the sunroof is fully tilted upward and the button is held
for an additional twenty seconds. This will reset the
memory and enable the sunroof to function properly.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls for
the memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seat, throttle and brake
pedals and both the driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors. The settings for these features can be saved
for up to two drivers.
2-61
To store the settings, do the following:
1. While the vehicle is in PARK (P), adjust the driver’s
seat, including the seatback recliner, lumbar, and
side wing area, throttle and brake pedals and
both of the outside mirrors to your preference.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has
been stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow
the preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound and
the memory position will be recalled.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
Easy Exit Seat
The controls for this memory function are located on the
driver’s door.
B (Easy Exit Seat):
This button is used to program
and recall the desired driver’s seat position when
exiting/entering the vehicle. The seat position can be
saved for up to two drivers.
2-62
To store the seat exit position, do the following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button. The seat will
move to the stored memory position.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored
for the selected button (1 or 2).
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:
• Press the exit button on the memory control.
• Or, if this feature is activated in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), removing the key from
the ignition will move the seat to the exit position.
See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-72 for more information on activating this
feature in the DIC.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Headlamps ..................................................3-14
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-16
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-17
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .........................3-18
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-18
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-18
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-19
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-19
Exit Lighting .................................................3-19
Front Reading Lamps ....................................3-19
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-20
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-20
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-21
Climate Controls ............................................3-21
Climate Control System .................................3-21
Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-22
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-25
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-30
Rear Air Conditioning System .........................3-30
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System .......3-31
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
and Electronic Climate Controls ...................3-34
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-36
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-37
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-38
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-38
Tachometer .................................................3-38
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-39
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-39
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-40
Battery Warning Light ....................................3-42
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-42
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-43
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-45
Traction Off Light ..........................................3-45
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-46
Transmission Temperature Gage .....................3-46
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-48
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-48
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-52
Security Light ...............................................3-53
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-53
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-53
Four-Wheel-Drive Light ..................................3-53
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-54
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-54
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-55
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-56
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-57
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-60
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-72
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-78
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-78
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) .........................................3-79
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-79
Radio with CD ..............................................3-82
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-93
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................3-108
Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-121
Rear Seat Entertainment System ...................3-122
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-133
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-134
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-135
Radio Reception .........................................3-136
Care of the Cassette Tape Player .................3-136
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-137
Care of the CD and DVD Player ...................3-137
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................3-138
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-138
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-138
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
A. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp
Override on page 3-19.
B. Headlamp Controls. See Headlamps on page 3-14.
C. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30.
D. Automatic Transfer Case Buttons. See Four-Wheel
Drive on page 2-28.
E. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-37.
G. Gearshift Lever. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-24.
H. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped).
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-27.
I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-78.
J. Dual Climate Control System. See Dual Climate
Control System on page 3-22. Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 3-25.
K. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 5-108.
L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
M. Steering Wheel Control Buttons (If Equipped).
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-56
and Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-135.
N. Center Instrument Panel Utility Block. See Center
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-110.
O. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
P. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake on
page 2-35.
Q. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtrays and Cigarette
Lighter on page 3-21. Accessory Power Outlets.
See Accessory Power Outlets on page 3-20.
R. Storage Area (If Equipped). See Center Console
Storage Area on page 2-57.
S. Ashtray. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on
page 3-21.
T. StabiliTrak® or Traction Assist System (TAS)
Button (If Equipped). See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-11 or Traction Assist System (TAS) on
page 4-9.
U. Glovebox. See Glove Box on page 2-57.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on top of the steering
column.
Tilt Wheel
If your vehicle is equipped with a tilt wheel, it will allow
you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you exit and enter your vehicle.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the lower left
side of the column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-9.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on
page 3-9.
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer
on page 3-10.
• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-11.
For information on the headlamps, see Headlamps on
page 3-14.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Turn Signal On Chime
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message
off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-107.
3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the
lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
8(Mist):
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
N(Delay):
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings. For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the delay
settings. To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
1 (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn
the band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9(Off):
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
3-9
Windshield Washer
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
This knob is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
L(Washer Fluid):
There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob to either 1 or 2.
For long delayed wiping, turn the knob to 1. For short
delayed wiping, turn the knob to 2.
9(Off): To turn the wiper off, turn the knob to this
symbol.
=(Washer Fluid):
To wash the window, press the
knob with this symbol.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
windows, check the fluid level.
3-10
T(Set):
Cruise Control
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
Press this button to set the speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
R(On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3-11
Setting Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
3-12
Resuming a Set Speed
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
3-13
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Headlamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to turn off the cruise control:
•
•
•
•
Step lightly on the brake pedal,
move the cruise control switch to off, or
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
®
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak feature, cruise
control will turn off if road conditions cause
StabiliTrak® to activate.
• If the accelerator pedal is held for 60 seconds or
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the headlamps.
Turn the control clockwise to operate the lamps.
The headlamp control has four positions:
Erasing Speed Memory
9 (Off): Turning the control to this position turns off
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
headlamps.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
AUTO (Automatic): Turning the control to this position
puts the system into automatic headlamp mode.
longer, cruise control will turn off.
3-14
; (Parking Lamps):
Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Roof Marker Lamps (If Equipped)
5 (Headlamps):
Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low-beam
by pushing the turn signal/high-beam lever towards
the instrument panel.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on and
off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away if
this happens.
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition is
off, in LOCK, ACCESSORY, or a door is open. To disable
the chime, turn the light off then back on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL
can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but
they can be especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO
• The automatic transmission is not in PARK (P)
• The light sensor determines it is daytime
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the headlamps
will go off, and your DRL lamps will illuminate,
provided it is not dark outside.
Shifting the transmission into PARK (P) will allow you to
idle the vehicle with the DRL off. The DRL will stay
off until you shift the transmission out of PARK (P).
This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the
United States.
3-15
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release. Turning off the automatic headlamp system
with the headlamp switch is not available for vehicles
first sold in Canada. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
you can turn off the automatic headlamp system
when parked at night by applying the parking brake
before starting your vehicle. The headlamps will remain
off once the vehicle is started for as long as you are
parked. If you release the parking brake, the lights will
turn on. If the parking brake is not released before
you begin to drive, the exterior lamps will turn on above
2 mph (3.2 km/h).
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor located on
the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille.
Be sure it is not covered, or the system will be on
whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During that
delay, your instrument panel cluster may not be as
bright as usual. Make sure your instrument panel
brightness control is in the full bright position. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-18.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, turn the control to the off position.
You may be able to turn off your Automatic Headlamp
System. See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on
page 3-15 for more information.
Your headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-72.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need them.
3-16
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better vision
in foggy or misty conditions.
The fog lamp button is
located on the left side of
the instrument panel.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Press the
button again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow
in the button when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on your headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after you
restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog
lamp button again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must
be on for your fog lamps to work.
3-17
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp
Instrument Panel Brightness
If your vehicle has this feature, this button includes
wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service
center to install an auxiliary roof lamp.
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
This button is located
on the center of the
instrument panel near
the climate controls.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to
the headlamp control.
Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel
lights. Turn the thumbwheel up to return the radio
display to full brightness when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on. To turn on the dome lamps, turn the
thumbwheel all the way up.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof
mounted lamp, pressing the button will activate the
lamp and illuminate an indicator light near the button.
Pressing the button again will turn off the roof
mounted lamp.
If your vehicle has this button, your vehicle may have
the snow plow prep package. For further information
see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on
page 4-57.
3-18
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning
the thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamps
control, all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps
will remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
Dome Lamp Override
Exit Lighting
E (Dome Lamp Override):
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lights will
not come on if the dome override button is pressed in.
You can use the dome
override button, located below the exterior lamps control,
to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when
a door is opened, or to remain off. To turn the lamps off,
press the button into the in position. With the button
in this position, the dome lamps will remain off when the
doors are open. To return the lamps to automatic
operation, press the button again and return it to the out
position. With the button in this position, the dome
lamps will come on when you open a door.
Front Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are
located on the overhead
console.
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry
feature.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome override button is in the out position.
If the dome override button is pressed in, the lamps will
not come on.
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button
located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the
button again.
The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction
you want.
3-19
Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets, or
may have one accessory power outlet located near
the cigarette lighter, if equipped. The cigarette lighter is
designed to fit only in the receptacle to the right of
the accessory power outlet.
To use the outlet, lift the cover. When not using it,
always close the cover.
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp. The lamps are fixed and
cannot be adjusted.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, and reading lamps if
they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the
ignition is off. This will keep the battery from
running down.
Accessory Power Outlets
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
3-20
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power plugs.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
The front ashtray is located near the center of the
instrument panel or on the front console, if equipped.
Pull on the ashtray door to open it.
Climate Control System
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back away
from the heating element when it is hot. Damage
from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Fan Knob
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
9 (Off): If the fan is off, outside air will still enter the
vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of
the mode knob. The temperature can also be adjusted
using the temperature knob.
3-21
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward
the blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
1 (Defrost):
This setting directs most air through the
windshield defroster outlets, side window defroster
outlets and some through the floor outlets.
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
H (Vent):
This setting directs the air through the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is delivered through the floor outlets
as well as the instrument panel outlets. The flow can
be divided between vent and floor outlets depending
upon where the knob is placed between the settings.
6 (Floor):
This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets, and the rest of the air is divided
between the windshield defroster outlets and the side
window defroster outlets.
W (Defog):
Airflow is delivered through the floor
outlets, the windshield defroster outlets and the side
window defroster outlets. The air flow can be divided
between floor and defrost depending upon where
the knob is placed between the settings.
3-22
9(Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob to the off position to turn off the fan. If
the knob is in off outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed based on the position of the
mode knob. The temperature can also be adjusted
using the temperature levers.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel vents.
)(Bi-Level):
An indicator on the button will light up, flash three times
and turn off when recirculation is selected in these
modes. The air-conditioning compressor will also come
on when this mode is activated. While in recirculation
mode the windows may fog when the weather is
cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either the blend
or defrost mode and increase fan speed.
This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel vents; then directs most of the
remaining air to the floor vents. A little air is directed
toward the windshield and the side window vents. Cooler
air is directed to the upper vents and warmer air to
the floor vents.
Temperature Control
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor vents with a little air directed to the windshield and
the side window vents.
Passenger’s Side: The lever on the right side of the
climate control panel is used to raise or lower the
temperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
@ (Recirculation):
#(Air Conditioning):
The recirculation mode is used
to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. Use this
mode to help prevent outside odors and/or dust
from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air inside
of your vehicle more quickly. Press this button to
turn the recirculation mode on or off. The light on the
recirculation button will illuminate. Recirculation cannot
be used in floor, bi-level, defog or defrost modes.
Driver’s Side: The lever on the left side of the climate
control panel is used to raise or lower the temperature
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This lever also
adjusts the temperature to the center console outlets
(if equipped).
Press this button to turn
the air-conditioning system on or off. When the button
is pressed, an indicator light will come on and the
system will begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside
of your vehicle. You may notice a slight change in
engine performance when the air conditioning
compressor shuts off and turns on again. This is
normal.
3-23
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to choose
from to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use
the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture
and warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to
remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Turn the right knob to select one of the following modes:
The rear window defogger will automatically turn off
several minutes after the button is pressed. Pressing the
button while the defogger is running can also turn off
the defogger.
-(Defog): This mode directs the air to the floor
outlets, windshield and the side window vents. The air
conditioning compressor will run automatically to
dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging. The
recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
defog mode.
1(Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window vents, with only a
little air directed to the floor vents. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically to dehumidify the
air to prevent window fogging. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-24
< (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this
button will activate them.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
will always flow through the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also
has a flow-through ventilation system described later in
this section.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the driver will be displayed under
and to the left of the temperature setting.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob
The passenger’s side knob can be used to change the
temperature of the air coming through the system
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature
can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This
is possible since outside air will always flow through the
system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is
set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this
section.
You can select different climate control settings for the
driver and passengers.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
of the air coming through the system on the driver’s
side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the
system is turned off. This is possible since outside air
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the temperature inside the vehicle. The
display will show the temperature setting decreasing or
increasing and an arrow pointing to the passenger
will be displayed under and to the right of the
temperature setting.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing and
holding the AUTO button for four seconds. Both the
driver and passenger arrows will be displayed.
3-25
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature, the
air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current driver’s set temperature, delivery
mode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button again
within five seconds to display the passenger’s set
temperature.
If the driver and passenger’s temperature settings
are not the same, the opposite side temperature
setting will be displayed for an additional five
seconds. To make the passenger’s temperature the
same as the driver’s, press and hold the AUTO
button for about four seconds.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run
when the outside temperature is over about
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet may
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down your vehicle. The light on the
button will illuminate in recirculation.
3-26
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C)
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of
the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on sun load, and
also turns on your headlamps.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the up
or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button, the
AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or
fan speed.
w9x (Fan):
The switch with the fan symbol allows
you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up
arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow
to decrease fan speed.
Pressing this button when the system is off will turn
the system on.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle; keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
If you press the mode button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air mode delivery. The display will then show the
current status of the system. When the system is turned
off, the display will go blank after displaying the
current status of the system.
H (Panel):
This setting will deliver air to the
instrument panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level):
This setting will deliver warmer air to the
floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
6 (Floor):
This setting will deliver air to the floor
- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
@(Recirculation):
Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light on
the recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when
you are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for
maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.
Press this button again to allow outside air to enter
the vehicle. The light on the recirculation button will
go off.
Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculation
feature. To resume the auto recirculation function,
press the AUTO button. Each time the vehicle is started,
the system will revert to the auto recirculation function.
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or
floor, the light in the button will flash and then go out to
let you know that this is not allowed. This is normal
and helps to prevent fogging.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the
system in recirculation for extended periods of time may
cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the
fog, select either defog or front defrost.
You may also notice that the A/C compressor will run
while in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
outlets.
3-27
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed to the floor. This direction can
be changed by pressing the mode button. The
temperature can also be adjusted using either
temperature knob. Press the up or down arrows on the
fan switch, the defrost button, the AUTO button, or
the air conditioning button to turn the system on when it
is off.
Display
If you press the MODE button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air delivery mode. After 10 seconds, the display will
change to show the driver’s temperature setting and the
selected mode.
If you press the up or down arrows on the fan switch,
the display will change to show the selected fan speed.
After 10 seconds, the display will change to show the
driver temperature setting and the selected mode.
Whenever you press AUTO, the display will change to
show the following:
• The current driver’s set temperature and an arrow
for five seconds
• The current passenger’s set temperature setting
and an arrow for five seconds
• The automatic air delivery mode and fan speed
3-28
If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings are
the same when AUTO is pressed, the temperature setting
and both arrows will be displayed for five seconds along
with the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed. After
the five second update, the display will change to show
the temperature setting, both arrows and AUTO.
Air Conditioning
#(Air Conditioning):
Press this button to turn the air
conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. The
snowflake symbol will appear on the display when the
A/C is on and will turn off when the air conditioning is off.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is
too cool for air conditioning will make the snowflake
symbol flash three times and then turn off to let
you know the air conditioning mode is not available. If
the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature
drops below a temperature which is too cool for air
conditioning to be effective, the snowflake symbol will
turn off to let you know the air conditioning mode
has been canceled.
When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode, the
system will run the air conditioning automatically to cool
and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle. If you select
A/C off while in front defrost, defog or recirculation, the
A/C snowflake symbol will turn off, but the A/C
compressor will still run to help prevent fogging.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
0 (Front Defrost):
Press the front defrost button to
defrost the windshield. The system will automatically
control the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO
mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or
warmer, your air conditioning compressor will
automatically run to help dehumidify the air and dry the
windshield.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm
air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn the
temperature knob to the desired setting.
Rear Window Defogger
In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify the
air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the
system will maximize its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
If your vehicle has this feature, the lines you see on the
rear window warm the glass. The rear window
defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
Defogging and Defrosting
<(Rear):
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front
defrost button to defrost the front windshield.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fog
or moisture. Press the mode button to select this
setting. This setting will deliver air to the floor and
windshield outlets.
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. If you need additional
warming time, press the button again.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this
button will activate them.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
3-29
Outlet Adjustment
Rear Air Conditioning System
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
If your vehicle has the optional rear air conditioner, it
has two rear air conditioning fan speed selectors.
One fan speed selector is located in the overhead
console and the other is located in the headliner above
the second row seats.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
fan knob all the way to the right for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your window.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-30
Front Control
To increase and decrease the flow of cooled air to the
rear vents, turn the knob to the fan speed you want.
The knob has three speed positions. To increase
the flow of cooled air, turn the knob clockwise. To
decrease the flow of cooled air, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
To operate the rear system using the front control, just
turn the knob to the fan position you want.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System
If your vehicle is equipped with this system, there are
two rear heat and air conditioning controls. One control
is located in the overhead console and the other is
located in the headliner above the second row seats.
The system can be controlled from the front controls as
well as the rear controls.
Rear Control
To use the rear control, first turn the front control to the
AUX position. Then, the rear control can be used to
increase and decrease the airflow.
Front Control
The front control has three knobs that control airflow
speed, temperature and airflow location.
3-31
Fan Knob
Mode Knob
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
9 (Off): An off setting, located on the front climate
control panel also allows the driver to turn off the
rear seat passenger seat controls from the front seat.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward
the blue area for cooler air.
3-32
H (Vent):
This setting directs the air through the
headliner outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is delivered through the floor outlets
as well as the headliner outlets. The flow can be
divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon
where the knob is placed between the settings.
6 (Floor):
This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward
the blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
Rear Controls
To use the rear control, first turn the front control to the
AUX position. Then, the rear control can be used to
adjust the airflow speed, temperature, and airflow
location.
Fan Knob
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
H (Vent):
This setting directs the air through the
headliner outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is delivered through the floor outlets
as well as the headliner outlets. The flow can be
divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon
where the knob is placed between the settings.
6 (Floor):
This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets.
9(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn the rear
seat comfort controls on or off.
3-33
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System and Electronic Climate
Controls
AUX: Turn the knob, located on the left side of the
control panel, to this position to allow the rear seat
passengers to have control over the rear climate control
system. See “Rear Passenger Console Control” later
for more information.
With this system, the front or rear passengers can
control the air temperature, airflow and fan speed for
the rear seat passengers. The climate control has
an overhead control near the driver and a control on the
back of the center console.
9 (Off): Turn the knob, located on the left side of the
control panel, to this position to turn the rear climate
control system off.
Driver Overhead Control
9(Fan):
To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan
knob located on the left side of the control panel to the
desired setting. Choose AUTO if you want the system
to automatically choose the fan speed to maintain
a selected temperature. See “Auto Mode” later in this
section for more information on using this feature.
°F (°C): To adjust the air temperature, turn the
temperature knob on the center of the control panel. For
cooler or warmer air, turn the knob counterclockwise
toward 66°F (19°C) or clockwise toward 82°F (27°C).
Front Controls - United States shown,
Canada similar
To control the rear climate control from the front seat
position, use the driver overhead control. The rear
console control must be on.
3-34
To regulate the airflow direction, adjust the right knob on
the control panel. Turn the knob clockwise for floor
vent airflow or counterclockwise for headliner vent
airflow. Generally, the upper vents are used for air
conditioning and the floor vents for heating. The knob
can be set to any blend setting. Choose AUTO if
you want the system to automatically regulate the
airflow. See “Auto Mode” later in this section for more
information on using this feature.
Rear Passenger Console Control
The rear seat controls have the following settings:
To control the rear climate control from the rear
passenger seat position, use the rear passenger console
control. The driver overhead control fan knob must be
set to the AUX position.
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn the rear seat
comfort controls on or off when the front overhead
control is set to AUX.
%(Mode): Press this button to select the air delivery
mode and AUTO mode. Choose AUTO if you want
the system to automatically regulate the airflow.
See “Auto Mode” later in this section for more
information on using this feature.
b (Temperature): Press this button up or down to
increase or decrease the temperature setting.
w9x(Fan):
Press this button up or down to adjust
the fan speed. Choose AUTO if you want the system
to automatically choose the fan speed to maintain
a selected temperature. See “Auto Mode” following for
more information on using this feature.
Rear Controls
AUTO Mode
When using the system in auto mode, find your comfort
setting by placing the temperature control to 74°F
(23°C) and allowing about 20 minutes for the system to
regulate. Then adjust the temperature setting as
necessary. If you choose full cold 60°F (15°C), the
system will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If
you choose full hot 90°F (32°C), the system will remain
at the maximum heat setting.
3-35
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-36
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They are a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with warning lights and gages. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60.
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States Heavy Duty Transmission version shown.
Canada and Light Duty Transmission Clusters similar.
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and
economically.
3-37
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Engine Hour Meter Display
The Driver Information Center (DIC) can also display
the number of hours the engine has run. To display the
engine hours, turn the ignition off, press and hold the
reset button for at least four seconds. The hour
meter will be displayed for up to 30 seconds, or until the
ignition is turned on. See DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-57 for more information.
3-38
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for approximately one second
while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
be provided for several seconds to remind people to
buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light will
also be provided and stay on for several seconds,
then it will flash for several more. You should buckle
your seat belt.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensors, the airbag modules, the passenger sensing
system (if equipped), the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-68.
If your vehicle is not
equipped with the
passenger sensing system,
this chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-78 for more
information.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
This means the system
is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-39
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If your vehicle has a passenger sensing system,
your rearview mirror will have a passenger airbag
status indicator.
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
3-40
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 3-39.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-78
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-41
Battery Warning Light
If this light is displayed
when the engine is
running, you may have a
problem with your charging
system.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
in RUN, this gage
shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.
The battery display will also stay on while the key is in
RUN until the engine is started.
If the light stays on after starting the engine it could
indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some
other charging system problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving with this light displayed could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light
displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and the air conditioner.
3-42
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage may
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings between the low and
high warning zones indicate the normal operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
Brake System Warning Light
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will
flash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try
to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime will
sound when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
3-43
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or may go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on
page 4-62.
3-44
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds.
That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. You will also hear a
chime sound when the light is on steady. If the regular
brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have
brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on you don’t
have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with
your regular brakes. In addition to both lights, you will
also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of
a problem and each time the vehicle is shut off and then
restarted. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-43.
Traction Off Light
If you have the Traction
Assist System, this light
should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition
to RUN.
If the light does not come on then, the system may
require service; have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if the system is turned off.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you are driving,
there may be a problem with your Traction Assist
System and your vehicle may need service. When this
light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
3-45
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-28.
3-46
Transmission Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
Your vehicle may be equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the
temperature of the transmission fluid. The normal
operating range is from 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
At approximately 265°F (130°C), the message center
will display a TRANSMISSION HOT message and
the transmission will enter a transmission protection
mode. When the transmission enters the protection
mode, you may notice a change in the transmission
shifting patterns. The transmission will return to normal
shifting patterns when the transmission fluid temperature
falls below 260°F (127°C).
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-56 for
further information.
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the Driver
Information Center will display a TRANS HOT IDLE
ENGINE warning message, and a chime will sound. Pull
the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so.
Set the parking brake, place the transmission in
PARK (P) and allow the engine to idle until the
transmission temperature falls below 260°F (127°C). If
the transmission continues to operate above 265°F
(130°C), contact your nearest dealer or the GM
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above normal
operating range, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your
vehicle while the transmission temperature gage
reading is above normal. See your dealer for service.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Vehicle overloading
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
3-47
Tire Pressure Light
If your vehicle is equipped
with the Tire Pressure
Monitor system, this light
will come on if the
system detects low tire
pressure.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message will
accompany the light.
This light will also come on for a bulb check when the
vehicle is started.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-67 for
more information.
For more information on your tires, see Tires on
page 5-60.
3-48
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-49
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoiding hard accelerations
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
3-50
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-51
Oil Pressure Gage
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as
possible. See “OIL PRESSURE LOW” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-60 and Engine Oil
on page 5-16.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
3-52
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
This light flashes when the
vehicle security system is
activated.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for more
information.
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
The four-wheel-drive
indicator will light up
when you shift the
transfer case into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages.
Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting
is normal.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 for more
information.
3-53
Tow/Haul Mode Light
Fuel Gage
This light is displayed
when the Tow/Haul mode
has been activated.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-67.
United States
Canada
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as
possible.
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-56.
3-54
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-5.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
3-55
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
The DIC buttons, if equipped, are located on the
steering wheel. The DIC can display information such
as the trip odometer, fuel economy, customization
features and warning/status messages.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel buttons, you will not have all of the features listed.
You will scroll through the odometer, trip odometer
and engine hours by pressing the trip odometer reset
stem located on the instrument panel cluster. You
will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC messages by
pressing the trip odometer reset stem. See Speedometer
and Odometer on page 3-38 for information on
features for vehicles without DIC buttons.
A 3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressure for vehicles
equipped with a tire pressure monitor, timer and
engine hours.
B t (Fuel Information): Press this button to display
the current range, fuel used, average fuel economy and
engine oil life.
C 4 (Customization): Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle.
D r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
DIC messages and clear them from the DIC display.
3-56
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the
ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display
the information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the steering
wheel. These buttons are trip information, fuel
information, customization and select. The button
functions are detailed in the following pages.
Trip Information Button
3 (Trip Information):
Press the trip information
button to scroll through the ODOMETER, TRIP A,
TRIP B, TIRE PRESSURES, TIMER and
ENGINE HOURS.
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles or kilometers. Pressing the reset stem
located on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off will
also display the odometer.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
miles or kilometers.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A
or TRIP B.
You can also reset TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster.
If you press and hold the reset stem or the select button
for four seconds, the display will show the distance
traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A or
TRIP B.
See Trip Odometer on page 3-38 for more information.
3-57
Tire Pressures: The tire pressure mode is available
only on vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor.
Press the trip information button until TIRE
PRESSURES appears on the display. This mode shows
the tire pressure in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa). Press the select button to scroll
through the following information:
• LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the left
front tire.
• RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the right
front tire.
• LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the left
rear tire.
• RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the right
rear tire.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will roll back to zero.
3-58
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Engine Hours: Press the trip information button until
ENGINE HOURS appears on the display. This
mode shows the total number of hours the engine has
run. Pressing and holding the reset stem located on
the instrument cluster for about four seconds will also
display the engine hour information after the odometer is
displayed when the vehicle is off.
Fuel Information Button
t (Fuel Information):
Press the fuel information
button to scroll through the range, fuel used, average
fuel economy and the engine oil life system.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling.
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
the tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel level
is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for
one second while FUEL USED is displayed.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button for one second
while AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy
is not reset, it will be continually updated each time
you drive.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, use the fuel
button to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen and
then press and hold the select button for five seconds
while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. OIL LIFE
RESET will appear on the display for 10 seconds to let
you know that the system is reset. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 5-19 for more information.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-16 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
Customization Button
4 (Customization):
Press the customization button to
access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize
the settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-72 for more information.
Select Button
r (Select): Press the select button to reset certain
DIC functions and set your customization settings.
For example, this button will reset the trip odometers
and scroll through the languages in which you can select
the DIC to display information.
3-59
DIC Warnings and Messages
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
Warning messages are displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to notify the driver that the
status of the vehicle has changed and that some action
may be needed by the driver to correct the condition.
If there is more than one message that needs to
be displayed, they will appear one after another. Some
messages may not require immediate action, but
you should press any of the four DIC buttons on the
steering wheel, if equipped, to acknowledge that
you received the messages and clear them from the
display. If your vehicle is not equipped with DIC buttons
on the steering wheel, press the trip odometer reset
stem located on the instrument panel cluster to
acknowledge messages and clear them from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be removed from the DIC
display. You should take any messages that appear on
the display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages will only make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
On some vehicles, if the battery is not charging during
operation, this message will appear on the DIC.
Driving with this problem could drain your battery. Have
the electrical system checked by your GM dealer as
soon as possible. See Battery Warning Light on
page 3-42 and Voltmeter Gage on page 3-42. Pressing
any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display.
3-60
BUCKLE PASSENGER
If your vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing
system, this message reminds you to buckle the
passenger’s seat belt. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-78.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, the
passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You should
have the passenger buckle their seat belt.
This reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on, the
vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag
is enabled. If the passenger’s seat belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
If your vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing
system, this message reminds you to buckle the
driver’s seat belt. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-78.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle
your seat belt.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is on
and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will be
repeated. If the driver’s seat belt is already buckled, this
message and chime will not come on.
This message is an additional reminder to the Safety
Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster. See
Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-39.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to
be changed. When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19 for information
on how to reset the message. This message will clear
itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle or until
the message is reset. See Engine Oil on page 5-16
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more
information.
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging system, this message
will appear on the DIC, a chime will sound, and the
battery warning light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. Driving with this problem could drain your
battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stop and
turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer
immediately. See Battery Warning Light on page 3-42
and Voltmeter Gage on page 3-42 for more information.
3-61
CHECK OIL LEVEL
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If your vehicle is equipped with an oil level sensor and
the oil level in the vehicle is low, this message will
appear on the DIC. Check the oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool or
warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message
will clear. Once the problem is corrected, pressing
any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display. This message will clear itself after 10 seconds,
until the next ignition cycle. See Engine Oil on
page 5-16 for additional information.
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer reservoir will clear the message. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-37. Pressing any of the four
DIC buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle is
not equipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display. This message will clear
itself after 10 seconds, until the next ignition cycle.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitor
system and a low tire pressure is detected in any of
the vehicle’s tires, this message will appear on the DIC,
along with a chime. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not
equipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display. It will appear at each
ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure.
3-62
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message will
appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing any of
the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display. If your
vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
ENGINE OVERHEATED
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC. Turn off the air conditioning. If
the message is still on, or if the engine coolant
temperature gage continues to rise, pull the vehicle over
when it is safe to do so. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-46 for more information.
Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle in PARK (P)
to allow the coolant to reach a safe temperature. This
message will clear when the coolant temperature
drops to a safe operating temperature. Pressing any of
the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display. If your
vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation, this message will appear in
the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe
damage. This message will clear when the engine
has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-28 for more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the fuel level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon as
possible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if
equipped, will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with
the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset
stem will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. See Fuel Gage on page 3-54, Fuel on
page 5-5 and Low Fuel Warning Light on page 3-55.
3-63
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry
System Operation on page 2-6. Pressing any of
the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display. If your
vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
If your vehicle is equipped with a low coolant level
sensor, this message will appear on the DIC if
the engine coolant level is low. Adding coolant will clear
the message. See Cooling System on page 5-30.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
in the Index for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed, this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing any
of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display. If
your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
3-64
OIL LIFE RESET
This message will appear on the DIC for about
10 seconds after resetting the change engine oil
message. See “Engine Oil Life System” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-57 and Engine Oil on
page 5-16 for more information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW
REAR ACCESS OPEN
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will be
displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate
it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. See Engine
Oil on page 5-16.
If the liftgate is open while the ignition is in RUN, this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear
a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the
DIC display. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons,
if equipped, will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped
with the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing any of
the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display. If your
vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message is displayed when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters
the engine coolant protection mode. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-28 for further information.
REPLACE LIFTGATE FUSE
This message will be displayed if the liftgate lock
malfunctions and/or the liftgate fuse blows. For more
information on fuses, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-107. If the message returns after replacing the
fuse, see your GM dealer for service.
3-65
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
SERVICE 4 WHEEL STEER
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed, this
message will appear on the display and you will hear
a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing any of
the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display. If your
vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
If a problem occurs with the four-wheel steer system,
this message will appear on the DIC. If the message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the four-wheel
steer system needs service. See your GM dealer. See
QUADRASTEER™ on page 4-16. Pressing any of
the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display. If your
vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
SERVICE 4WD (Four-Wheel-Drive)
If a problem occurs with the four-wheel-drive system
this message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the
four-wheel-drive system needs service. See your
GM dealer. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if
equipped, will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with
the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset
stem will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
3-66
SERVICE AIR BAG
If there is a problem with the airbag system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have your
GM dealer inspect the system for problems. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 3-39 and Airbag System on
page 1-68 for more information. Pressing any of the
four DIC buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display. If your
vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If there is a problem with the brake system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the brake
system needs service. See your GM dealer. Pressing
any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display.
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM
On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the battery
charging system, this message will appear on the
DIC. Under certain conditions, the battery warning light
may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster.
See Battery Warning Light on page 3-42. The battery
will not be charging at an optimal rate and the vehicle
will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode.
The vehicle is safe to drive, however you should have
the electrical system checked by your GM dealer.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the four
DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
If a problem occurs with the suspension system, this
message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If this message is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the ride control needs service.
See your GM dealer. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not
equipped with the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display.
3-67
SERVICE STABILITY
If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY message, it
means there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak®
system. If you see this message, try to reset the system.
Stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again.
If the SERVICE STABILITY message still comes
on, it means there is a problem. You should see your
GM dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®,
so reduce your speed and drive accordingly. Pressing
any of the four DIC buttons, if equipped, will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display. If your vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitor
system, this message will be displayed if one or more
of the tire monitor sensors have malfunctioned or if all of
the tire monitor sensors have not been programmed
successfully. See your GM dealer. Pressing any of the
3-68
four DIC buttons, if equipped, will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display. If your
vehicle is not equipped with the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display. The
message will reappear at each ignition cycle until the
system has been serviced. See your GM dealer.
STABILITY SYS (System) ACTIVE
You may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on
the DIC. It means that an advanced computer-controlled
system has come on to help your vehicle continue to
go in the direction in which you are steering. StabiliTrak®
activates when the computer senses that your vehicle
is just starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice
or other slippery spot on the road. When the system
activates, you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the
brake pedal. This is normal. When the STABILITY
SYS ACTIVE message is on, you should continue to
steer in the direction you want to go. The system
is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult
driving situations by making the most of whatever
road conditions will permit.
STABILITY SYS (System) DISABLED
The STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will turn on
when you press the StabiliTrak® button, or when
the stability control has been automatically disabled. To
limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you should normally
leave StabiliTrak® on. However, you should turn
StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud,
ice, or snow and you want to “rock” your vehicle to
attempt to free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road
conditions and require more wheel spin. See If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-50. To turn the StabiliTrak® system back on,
press the StabiliTrak® button again.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message will also be displayed if the brake
system warning light is on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-43.
• The message could be displayed if the stability
system takes longer than usual to complete its
diagnostic checks due to driving conditions.
• If an engine or vehicle related problem has been
detected and the vehicle needs service, the
message will appear. See your GM dealer.
• The message will also appear if the vehicle is
shifted into 4LO.
The message will turn off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly, this
message may appear along with the check engine light
on the instrument panel cluster. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-48. Reinstall the fuel cap
fully. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn
this light and message off.
3-69
TRACTION ACTIVE
When the traction control system has detected that any
of the vehicle’s wheels are spinning, the traction
control system will activate and this message will appear
on the DIC. See Traction Assist System (TAS) on
page 4-9 for more information.
TRACTION SYS (System) LIMITED
If the brake traction control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high-speed
braking, brake traction control will be displayed and the
TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed.
The system will return to normal operation after the
brakes have cooled.
3-70
TRANS (Transmission) HOT IDLE
ENGINE
If the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot, this
message will appear on the DIC along with a continuous
chime. Driving with the transmission fluid temperature
high can cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle
and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This
message will clear and the chime will stop when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level. See Transmission
Temperature Gage on page 3-46.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
TRANSMISSION HOT
If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high, this
message will appear on the DIC.
When the transmission enters the protection mode, you
may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
• Towing a trailer
• Hot outside air temperatures
• Hauling a large or heavy load
•
•
•
•
Over-loading
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons,
if equipped, will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display. If your vehicle is not equipped
with the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display.
3-71
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one setting
based on your preference. All of the customizable
options listed may not be available on your vehicle. Only
the options available will be displayed on your Driver
Information Center (DIC).
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P). Press the
customization button to scroll through the available
customizable options.
After pressing the customization button, VEHICLE
SETTINGS will momentarily display before going to a
customization option.
Lock Doors
Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS
appears in the display. To select your preference
for automatic locking, press the select button while
LOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
3-72
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11.
Unlock Doors
Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS
appears in the display. To select your preference for
automatic unlocking, press the select button while
UNLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11.
Door Lock Delay
If your DIC does not have this feature, you can still
program the delayed locking feature. See Delayed
Locking on page 2-10 for more information.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter and a door or
the liftgate is open, the delayed locking feature will delay
locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after
the last door is closed.
Press the customization button until DOOR LOCK
DELAY appears in the display. To select your
preference for delayed locking, press the select button
while DOOR LOCK DELAY is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
DOOR LOCK DELAY: OFF (default): The doors will
lock immediately when pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
DOOR LOCK DELAY: ON: The doors will not lock
until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate
is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the
delayed locking feature is in use. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the lock button on
the door or the remote keyless entry transmitter a
second time.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
Lock Feedback
Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK
appears in the display. To select your preference for
the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle with
the remote keyless entry transmitter, press the select
button while LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3-73
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Unlock Feedback
Headlamp Delay
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
preference for the feedback you will receive when
unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY appears in the display. To select your
preference for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMP DELAY is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
3-74
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds) (default)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Perimeter Lights
Press the customization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS appears in the display. To select your
preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
while PERIMETER LIGHTS is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Easy Exit Seat
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears in the display. To select your preference for
seat position exit, press the select button while
EASY EXIT SEAT is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit
recall will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit, see Memory Seat on
page 2-61.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
3-75
Curb View
Alarm Warning
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW
appears in the display. To select your preference for
curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING
appears in the display. To select your preference for
alarm warning, press the select button while ALARM
WARNING is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse, see Outside Curb
View Assist Mirrors on page 2-49.
3-76
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17.
Language
Display Units
To select your preference for display language, press
the select button while LANGUAGE is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following languages:
Press the customization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric, press
the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
• ENGLISH
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold the customization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
Francais will be in French and Espanol will be in
Spanish. When you see the language that you would
like, release both buttons. The DIC will then display the
information in the language you chose.
• DISPLAY UNITS: ENGLISH
• DISPLAY UNITS: METRIC
If you choose English, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance in miles and fuel
economy in miles per gallon. If you choose metric, all
information will be displayed in metric units. For
example, distance in kilometers and fuel economy in
liters per 100 kilometers.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and end out of the customizable options.
You can also scroll through the different languages by
pressing and holding the trip reset stem for four seconds,
as long as you are in the odometer mode.
3-77
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it.
3-78
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system
can be played even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-21 for
more information.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. There is an initial two-second
delay before the clock goes into time-set mode.
Display the time with the ignition off, by pressing RCL,
HR, or MIN.
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
AM-FM Radio
The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR
to represent hours and an M or MN to represent
minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
button until the correct minute appears on the display.
The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
RDS TIME appears on the display. To accept this
time, press and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the
same time, for another two seconds. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the
display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency, band, and the
time. When the ignition is off, press this knob to display
the time.
3-79
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next preset station. Press either SEEK
arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-80
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust bass or treble, press and release
AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the display. Then
press and hold the up or the down arrow to increase
or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero or T
and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD appears
on the display. Then press and hold the up or the
down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN
will appear on the display.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L (balance) and
a zero or F and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN
will appear on the display.
Fade may not be available if the vehicle is a regular
cab model.
3-81
Radio Messages
Radio with CD
CAL (Calibrated): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that the radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
3-82
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-83
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while
in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
Finding a Station
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will
now be the default.
o TUNE p:
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL
OFF appears on the display.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-84
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
To adjust the bass or treble to the middle position, while
it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The
radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level
to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and
classical. Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or
treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble
settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,
the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-85
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position,
while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, then push it
again and hold it until the radio produces one beep.
The balance and fade will be adjusted to the middle
position and the display will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
3-86
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed, go
back to Step 1.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit
program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two
seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
at a station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-87
RDS Messages
Radio Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
3-88
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-89
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM
dealer.
3-90
Playing a CD
Insert a CD part way into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the INFO knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Notice: If you add paper labels to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to
play scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage
the CD player. When using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition without paper labels,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and
the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go
to the beginning of the current track if more than
eight seconds have played. TRACK and the track
number will appear on the display. If this pushbutton
is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3-91
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
© SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
3-92
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The inactive CD will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop and eject a CD
when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing.
Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if
this button is pressed first.
CD Messages
Radio with Cassette and CD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
3-93
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based
in the 48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-94
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while
in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
Finding a Station
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
o TUNE p:
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL
OFF appears on the display.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-95
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
To adjust the bass or treble to the middle position while
it is displayed, while it is displayed, push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep and
adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and
classical. Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or
treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble
settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,
the AUTO EQ settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-96
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, then push it
again and hold it until the radio produces one beep.
The balance or fade will be adjusted to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
TYPE button then, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows twice to
exit program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
3-97
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
scanning.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-98
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, while in PTY
select mode, the PTY that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
Radio Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-99
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-100
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM
dealer.
3-101
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, the tape can be inserted,
but will not play until ignition and radio are on. If the
ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The cassette
tape symbol will appear on the display and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing. The tape
player will play the other side of the tape when it
reaches the end.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
3-102
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous selection on the tape if the current selection
has been playing for less than three seconds. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing
from three to 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning
of the previous selection or the beginning of the current
selection, depending on the position on the tape. If
pressed when the current selection has been playing for
more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to −9.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds of
silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. Pressing this pushbutton multiple times, in next
mode, will increase the number of selections to be
searched forward. SEEK and a positive number
will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed. The
station frequency and REV will appear on the display.
Select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE
and SEEK.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The radio will play while the
tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The station frequency and FWD will
appear on the display. Select stations during forward
operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
© SEEK ¨: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If either arrow is pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving forward or
backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next selection, play for 10 seconds,
then go on to the next selection. Press either the SCAN
or the TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning. The
tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop and eject a
tape when it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not
playing. Eject may be activated with the radio off.
3-103
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play due to one of the
following errors:
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your
player is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt
to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of the Cassette Tape Player on page 3-136.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
3-104
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the tape symbol on the display will flash, indicating
the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD part way into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the INFO knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Notice: If you add paper labels to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to
play scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage
the CD player. When using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition without paper labels,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and
the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. TRACK and the track number will
appear on the display. If this pushbutton is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3-105
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance
at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM and the track number
will appear on the display when each track starts to play.
Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
© SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or to the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrow
is pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
3-106
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then press and
hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop and eject a CD
when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing.
Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if
this button is pressed first.
CD Messages
Listening to a DVD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the TAPE
DISC button until RSE appears on the radio display.
The current radio source will stop and the DVD sound
will come through the speakers. To stop listening to
the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button, if a cassette
tape or a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button
to select a different source.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear
on the radio display. The radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 3-122 for
more information.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-107
Radio with Six-Disc CD
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
3-108
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOLUME p: Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while
in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will
now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AUTO
VOL OFF appears on the display.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-109
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
o TUNE p:
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
© SEEK ¨:
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN appears on
the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSC will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-110
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass or treble to the middle position while
it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The
radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level
to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward
the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display
level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,
the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-111
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either the
TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take you
to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
TYPE button then, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows twice to
exit program type select mode.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two
seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
scanning.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-112
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Radio Messages
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, while in PTY
mode, the PTY that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-113
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-114
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM
dealer.
3-115
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
3-116
Notice: If you add paper labels to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to
play scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage
the CD player. When using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition without paper labels,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and
the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
MULTI LOAD # will appear on the display.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load
a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The
CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load
more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear under
the CD number that is playing and the track number will
appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
CD
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
EJECT ALL will appear on the display.
2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD # will
appear on the display. The CD will eject and can
be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will
begin flashing again and another CD will eject.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
eject button.
3-117
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25-second time
period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
eject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
{ REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
3-118
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on
one CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
©SCAN ¨:
To scan one CD, press and hold
either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until
TRACK SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. The radio will go to the next track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press either
SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until ALL CD
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep.
Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track
of each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then press
and hold the knob until you hear a beep. The selected
display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will
begin to play.
3-119
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will sound to confirm
the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPE
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return
to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will be heard to confirm that
the track has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep will be heard,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
3-120
CD Messages
Listening to a DVD
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
To listen to the DVD, press the CD AUX button until
RSE appears on the radio display. The current
radio source will stop and the DVD sound will come
through the speakers.
To stop listening to the DVD, press the CD AUX button,
if a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button to select
a different source.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear
on the radio display. The radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 3-122 for
more information.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that
includes Radio Data System (RDS) information and
XM™ Satellite Radio Service capabilities (if equipped).
For information on how to use this system, see the
“Navigation System” manual.
3-121
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Headphones
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system includes
a DVD player, a video display screen, two sets of
wireless headphones, and a remote control.
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
Parental Control
This button is located behind the video screen. Press
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
other button operations from the remote control and
the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
Press this button again to restore operation of the
DVD player.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition is
in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only. The
driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
3-122
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control. An
indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
when they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” following for more information.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
if they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes to save battery power. The signal may be
lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
(if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,
instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing
through the RSE.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. The
yellow connector inputs video and the red and white
connectors input right and left audio. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection of the
auxiliary device.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
button on the faceplate or the remote control will
switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC. In
some countries, the video format may be in the
PAL system. To change the video format, perform the
following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video
Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
3-123
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE
system may be selected as an audio source on the
radio if the RSE system power is on. Once the
RSE system is selected as an audio source on the
radio, adjust the speaker volume on the radio, if
necessary. If the RSE system power is not on, the RSE
system will not be an available source on the radio.
Refer to the radio information for the radio that
your vehicle has for more information.
3-124
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
an audio source on the rear seat audio system if
the RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat
Audio (RSA) on page 3-133 for more information.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console. To
use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position. The
video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless
headphones and the remote control. If the screen
is in the closed position, the signals will not be available
for the operation of the headphones or the remote
control.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for more
information.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console. The
DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control” later in this section for more
information.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country
that the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code
is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
into the DVD player.
When using the wired headphones, not included, if the
front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio
Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio for
these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that is currently
playing through the RSE.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
3-125
y (Main DVD Menu):
Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
z (Set-up Menu):
DVD Player Buttons
O(Power):
Press this button to turn the RSE system
on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate
when the power is on.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop):
Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
3-126
Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
press this button to display the feature, then press
and hold this button. The default setting will appear on
the display.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold this
button to display and to remove the track and time
information.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
Playing a Disc
Ejecting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start, if
the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when RAP is
active.
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the remote
control.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.
If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer
to the on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
period of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote control
does not have a press and hold feature.
3-127
Remote Control Buttons
z (Set-up Menu):
Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
e (Audio):
Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
v (Title):
Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
3-128
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides you with the capability of direct chapter,
title, and track number selection.
}10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
\ (Clear):
Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a number to clear the number(s).
P (Illumination):
Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
y (Main DVD Menu):
Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
q (Return):
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
menu is active.
| (Camera Angle):
Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitle):
Press this button to turn on subtitles and
to move through subtitle options when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
u (Next Track/Chapter):
Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
3-129
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
Problem
No power.
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Disc will not play.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
The disc was ejected, but
it was pulled back into
the DVD player.
3-130
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
Check the display
mode settings in the
display menu.
The disc is being stored
in the DVD player. Press
the eject button again to
eject the disc.
Problem
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
The language in the
audio or on the screen
is wrong.
The remote control does
not work.
Recommended Action
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Change the Video
Format to PAL or NTSC.
See “Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
Check the audio or
language selection in the
main DVD menu.
Check to make sure
there is no obstruction
between the remote
control and the
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
Problem
After stopping the player, I
push Play but sometimes
the DVD starts where I
left off and sometimes at
the beginning.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Recommended Action
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Turn the DVD power off,
then on, then press the
load/eject button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
3-131
Problem
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out
or buzzes.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
The audio/video skips
or jumps.
The audio from the radio
for the Radio with
Six-Disc CD and XM™
has taken over the audio
from the DVD or CD
when using the wired
headphones.
3-132
Recommended Action
Check for obstructions,
low batteries, reception
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
See your dealer for
assistance.
Check that the DVD
player is in DVD mode.
The DVD or CD could be
dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
The RSE is working
correctly.
Use the wireless
headphones or have the
front seat passengers
listen to another audio
source.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
DVD Distortion
There may be an experience with audio distortion in
the wireless headphones when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning
Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or
walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the sources: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs.
However, the rear seat passengers can only control the
sources that the front seat passengers are not listening
to. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to and
control cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs through the
headphones while the driver listens to the radio through
the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have
control of the volume for each set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority over
the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch the
source for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA will
not be able to control the source. You can operate the
rear seat audio when the main radio is off.
RSA with HVAC Shown, RSA without HVAC Similar
P (Power):
Press this button to turn the system on or
off. The rear speakers will be muted when the power
is turned on unless your vehicle is equipped with
the Bose® audio system.
u (Volume):
Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. The left knob controls the left
headphones and the right knob controls the right
headphones.
SRC (Source): Press this button to select a
source: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs.
3-133
x SEEK w: When listening to FM1, FM2, or AM
press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to
the previous station and stay there. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to
the radio.
When a cassette tape is playing, press the up or the
down arrow to go to the next or the previous selection.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
are listening to a cassette tape.
When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go to the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go
to the start of the current track if more than
eight seconds have played. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station set on the pushbuttons on the
main radio. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to
go to the other side of the tape. This function is inactive
if the front seat passengers are listening to a
cassette tape.
3-134
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
beginning of the CD. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to a CD.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on
the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to
play the other side of the tape.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs
are loaded.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
g (OnStar/Mute):
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press
this button to interact with the OnStar® system. See
the OnStar® manual provided with your vehicle for more
information.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar®, press this button
to silence the system. Press it again, or any other
radio button, to turn on the sound.
Q SOURCE R: Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), or a
cassette tape or CD. The cassette or CD must be loaded
to play. Available loaded sources are shown on the
display as a tape or a CD symbol.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a cassette tape or CD is playing, press the up or
the down arrow to fast forward or reverse.
Q VOLR (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
3-135
Radio Reception
Care of the Cassette Tape Player
AM
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
3-136
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hours
without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message
appears on the display, the cassette tape player
needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should
be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape
or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
tape detection feature on the radio may recognize it as a
broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the
cut tape detection feature will be active again.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-137
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change the
volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with the
ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume
level will change from the normal level to loud, and
LOUD will appear on the radio display. To change back
to the default or normal setting, press and hold
pushbutton 6 again. The chime level will change from
the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appear
on the radio display. Each time the chime volume is
changed, three chimes will sound as an example of the
new volume selected. Removing the radio and not
replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will
disable vehicle chimes.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the cowl. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of the XM™ system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
3-138
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Traction Assist System (TAS) ...........................4-9
Locking Rear Axle ........................................4-10
StabiliTrak® System ......................................4-11
Steering ......................................................4-14
QUADRASTEER™ ........................................4-16
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-19
Passing .......................................................4-19
Loss of Control .............................................4-21
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-22
Driving at Night ............................................4-37
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-38
City Driving ..................................................4-40
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-41
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-42
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-43
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-44
Winter Driving ..............................................4-45
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-50
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-50
Recovery Hooks ...........................................4-51
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-52
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment .......4-57
Towing ..........................................................4-62
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-62
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-62
Level Control ...............................................4-65
Autoride® .....................................................4-66
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-66
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-67
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-23.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC
might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid
the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Assist System
(TAS) on page 4-9.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
4-6
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-45.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights
and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned
on until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for
service.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
Traction Assist System (TAS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Assist System (TAS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
The traction control system is enabled every time your
vehicle is started. The system will activate if it senses
that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose
traction.
You may hear or feel the system working or notice a
lack of accelerator response, but this is normal.
The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you
may notice a reduction in acceleration. This is normal
and doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Examples of these conditions include a hard
acceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift of
the transmission or driving on rough roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
Cruise Control on page 3-11.
When the traction off light
is on, the TAS is off and
will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
The traction off light will come on under the following
conditions:
• The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by
pressing the TAS on/off button or turning off the
automatic engagement feature of the TAS.
• The transmission is in FIRST (1); TAS will not
operate in this gear. This is normal.
• The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road.
When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slows
down or stops, the light will go off and TAS will
be on again. This is normal.
• A Traction Assist System, Anti-Lock Brake System
or engine-related problem has been detected and
the vehicle needs service.
• If the vehicle has been driven with the TAS system
on for long periods of time, or if the vehicle has
gone through many high speed braking maneuvers
the system may be automatically disabled. The
system will automatically re-enable after
approximately two minutes of not using the brakes.
4-9
The Traction Assist System, as delivered from the
factory, will automatically come on whenever you start
your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should always leave the
system on. But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need
to. You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
on page 4-50.
To turn the system on or
off, press the TAS on/off
button located on the
instrument panel.
If desired, you can change the TAS automatic
engagement feature so that the system will not come on
automatically when the engine is started. To do so:
1. Park the vehicle with the ignition off and the
transmission in PARK (P).
2. Turn the ignition to RUN; do not start the engine.
3. Apply the brake pedal, shift into NEUTRAL (N),
press the accelerator pedal to the floor and then
press the TAS on/off button and hold it down for at
least six seconds.
4. Release the TAS button and both pedals.
5. Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds.
The next time you start your vehicle, the TAS will not
automatically come on. You can restore the automatic
feature by using the same procedure. Whether the TAS is
set to come on automatically or not, you can always turn
the system on or off by pressing the TAS on/off button.
Locking Rear Axle
If you used the button to turn the system off, the traction
off light will come on and stay on. You can turn the
system back on at any time by pressing the button
again. The traction off light should go off.
4-10
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may be equipped with the StabiliTrak®
system which combines antilock brake, traction
and stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most
driving conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately
two miles of driving before the system initializes.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the STABILITY
SYS DISABLED or SERVICE STABILITY message
will be displayed. If the vehicle has gone through heavy
acceleration or braking during the first two miles after
starting your vehicle, the STABILITY SYS DISABLED
message may appear. If this is the case, your
vehicle does not need servicing. Turn your vehicle off
and back on again to reset the system. If either message
appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), and
your vehicle hasn’t gone through hard acceleration
or braking in the first two miles, your vehicle should be
taken in for service.
The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) only when the
system is both on and activated. You may also feel or
hear the system working; this is normal. For more
information on the stability messages, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-56.
The StabiliTrak® button
is located on the
instrument panel.
StabiliTrak® and part of the traction control system can
be turned off or back on by pressing the StabiliTrak®
button. All-wheel drive vehicles must be in all-wheel
drive mode to turn the system on or off.
Four-wheel-drive vehicles must be in 2HI, 4HI or
AUTO 4WD to turn the system on or off.
4-11
When the system is turned off, the traction off light will
illuminate, and the STABILITY SYS DISABLED
message will appear on the DIC to warn the driver that
both the stability system and part of the traction
control system are disabled. Your vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when StabiliTrak® is off, but
will not be able to use the engine speed management
system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for
more information.
When the StabiliTrak® system has been turned off, you
may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to
attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-50.
When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stability system is
automatically disabled, and the STABILITY SYS
DISABLED message will appear on the DIC. In 4LO,
the StabiliTrak® button only turns the traction control
system on and off.
4-12
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak®
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate
and display the TRACTION ACTIVE message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if it senses that any of
the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction
while driving. If you turn off StabiliTrak®, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will work.
The engine speed management will be disabled. In
this state, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This
can cause the brake-traction control to activate
constantly. For more information on the traction active
message, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 3-56.
Notice: If you have All-Wheel Drive with
StabiliTrak® and the traction off light comes on due
to heavy braking and/or because the traction
control system has been continuously active, do not
allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively.
If you do, you may be causing damage to the
transfer case. This could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty.
If the brake traction-control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed
braking, brake traction-control will be disabled and the
TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed. In
the limited mode, the traction-control system will only
use engine traction-control and is limited in it’s ability to
provide optimal performance since the system will
not utilize brake traction-control to control slip on the
drive wheels. The system will return to normal operation
after the brakes have cooled. This can take up to
two minutes or longer depending on brake usage.
Notice: If you have All-Wheel Drive with
StabiliTrak® and allow the wheel(s) of one axle to
spin excessively while the traction off, ABS and
brake warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITY
message are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC), and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When
road conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-11.
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
4-13
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-14
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Assist
System (TAS) on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-15
QUADRASTEER™
The QUADRASTEER™ System has a control and
diagnostic module that monitors and records current
system status and operational information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 4-Wheel Steer
system, it has the ability to steer the vehicle with all
four wheels.
Once the 4-Wheel Steer mode is selected, it is
recommended to leave the vehicle in this mode at all
times, and during all driving and weather conditions.
You can select this mode at any speed, however, if you
are turning, the system will not engage until the turn
is complete.
The 4-Wheel Steer system is equipped with
three different driving modes:
2: Two-wheel steering
4: Four-wheel steering
_:
Four-wheel steering with a trailer mode
The switch is located on the instrument panel.
2: In this mode, the vehicle will operate like any other
vehicle with two-wheel steering. If you want to use
2-wheel steer mode and your vehicle is not in this mode,
press the button until the 2 indicator, located to the
right of the 4-Wheel Steer button, lights up. If the
2 indicator is flashing, you will have to center the
steering wheel by turning it to the left or right.
Your vehicle will return to 2 when the transmission is
shifted into NEUTRAL (N), for example when entering a
car wash.
If you want to use tire chains, the vehicle needs to be in
2-wheel steer mode. For more information see Tire
Chains on page 5-76.
4-16
4: In this mode, all four wheels will help steer the
vehicle. If you want to use 4, and your vehicle is not in
this mode, press the button, until the 4 indicator,
located to the right of the 4-Wheel Steer button, comes
on and stays on. If the 4 indicator is flashing, you
will have to center the steering wheel by turning it to
the left or right.
Higher Speeds (40 mph (64 km/h), and above)
At higher speeds the front and rear wheels will turn in
the same direction. This improves stability of the vehicle
during lane changes and sweeping turns.
Slower Speeds (below 40 mph (64 km/h))
At slower speeds the front and rear wheels will turn in
opposite directions. This helps the vehicle make
tighter turns, such as during parking, cornering and
turning into tight spaces.
4-17
_ (4-Wheel Steer Tow Mode): When towing a
trailer, the 4-wheel steer tow mode provides enhanced
stability allowing the trailer to follow the path of the
tow vehicle more closely, especially during lane
changes.
In this mode the system operates much like the 4 mode,
but is enhanced for trailer towing. It is recommended
for all types and weights of trailers.
To engage the 4-wheel steer tow mode, press the
button until the 4 and tow mode indicators light up on
the instrument panel. If the tow indicator is flashing, you
will have to center the steering wheel by turning it to
the left or right. While in the 4-wheel steer tow mode, it
is possible the steering wheel may be slightly off
center. For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-67.
Car Washes for QUADRASTEER™
Equipped Vehicles
Notice: Because your vehicle has a wider rear
track a small number of older car washes may be
too narrow for your vehicle. Conveyor systems
on some automatic car washes may damage your
vehicle. Only use conveyor system car washes with
13-inch (33 cm) wide conveyor rails and/or
stationary washes with at least 82 inches (208 cm)
between the rails. Before using the car wash
check with the manager.
A. 13 inches (33 cm)
B. 82 inches (208 cm)
4-18
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel
to go straight down the roadway.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-19
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
4-20
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that if
your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Assist System (TAS),
remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid. See
Traction Assist System (TAS) on page 4-9. If you do
not have this system, or if the system is off, then
an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-21
Off-Road Driving
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
drive or all-wheel drive. Also, see Braking on page 4-6.
If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive or
all-wheel drive, you should not drive off-road unless you
are on a level, solid surface.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
bumper lower air dam.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide. You
will find many driving tips and suggestions. These
will help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
4-22
The front bumper lower air dam is held in place by a
series of push-pins located around the lower edge of the
front bumper. The push-pins are accessible from
underneath the front bumper.
The following steps must be performed on each of the
push-pins to remove the air dam:
1. Insert a tool into the
push-pin slot and pull
downward until the
push-pin snaps loose.
3. Pull the push-pins and
lower air dam assembly
away from the
retainers until the lower
air dam is free.
When you are back on roads, though, be sure to
replace the air dam.
2. While continuing to pull
downward on the
push-pin, squeeze and
turn the expandable
end of the push-pin with
a tool until it releases
from the retainer.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front bumper lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flow to the engine
and may allow things like fog lamps or tow hooks
on the front of your vehicle to be damaged. Always
be sure to replace the front bumper air dam when
you are finished off-road driving.
4-23
To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:
1. Line up each push-pin
with its intended
retainer and push the
washer portion of
the push-pin towards
the retainer until it locks
into place.
2. Push the flat end of the
push-pin towards the
retainer until it
locks into place,
making sure each
is secure.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if equipped) are properly attached.
Be sure you read all the information about your
four-wheel-drive or all-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual.
Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated?
Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are
the local laws that apply to off-roading where you
will be driving? If you do not know, you should check
with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
4-24
Environmental Concerns
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
•
•
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground).
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52 and Tires
on page 5-60.
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-25
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
4-26
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you are
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways.
Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may
experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed
acceleration, poor traction and longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-3.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-27
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to
the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as
you near the top, but you may not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
{CAUTION:
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.
4-28
sharply steeper in places?
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
4-29
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or
is about to stall, and I cannot make it up
the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
4-30
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
hill and decide I just cannot do it. What should
I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
4-31
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” Your
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
4-32
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may
be too steep to drive across. When you go
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to
the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when you drive
across an incline, the much more narrow track
width — the distance between the left and
right wheels — may not prevent the vehicle from
tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an incline
puts more weight on the downhill wheels. This
could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it
can hit something that will trip it — a rock, a
rut, etc. — and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
4-33
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If
you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to
roll over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-34
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
{CAUTION:
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend to
sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-35
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long
as your tailpipe is under water, you will never be
able to start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may
take you longer to stop.
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your
vehicle downstream and you and your
passengers could drown. If it is only shallow
CAUTION:
4-36
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
water, it can still wash away the ground from
under your tires, and you could lose traction
and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive through
rushing water.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-38 for
more information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-37
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-38
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-39
Driving Through Flowing Water
City Driving
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just
•
•
your parking lamps — to help make you more
visible to others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-60.
4-40
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-41.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-41
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
4-42
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-43
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving on page 4-22 for information about driving
off-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-44
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Winter Driving
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
•
•
•
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-60.
4-45
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-46
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have the traction assist system (TAS), it will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. But you can turn the TAS off if you ever
need to. You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-50. Even if your vehicle has TAS, you will want
to slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want to
turn the TAS off, such as when driving through deep
snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion
at lower speeds. See Traction Assist System (TAS)
on page 4-9.
If you do not have TAS, accelerate gently. Try not to
break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the
drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under
the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brake system (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will want
to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
page 4-7.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-47
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-48
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
4-49
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-76.
4-50
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If you have
a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI or 4LO. If
your vehicle has the Traction Assist System (TAS), you
should turn it off by pressing the TAS on/off button. If
your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® System, turn the
StabiliTrak® System off by pressing the
StabiliTrak® button so that the STABILITY SYSTEM
DISABLED and TRACTION OFF lights are illuminated
on the instrument panel cluster. Then shift back and
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out
after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you
can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has
them. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-62.
Recovery Hooks
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle.
You may need to use them if you are stuck off-road
and need to be pulled to some place where you
can continue driving.
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
4-51
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed
to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-52
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below
the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-60
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-67 for
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules and trailering tips.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-53
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
4-54
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the
size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation
pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
4-55
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
The Certification/Tire label also contains information
about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-56
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and
installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment
Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle, here are
some things you will need to know:
Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow
plow prep package, adding a plow can damage your
vehicle, and the repairs would not be covered by
warranty. Unless your vehicle was built to carry
a snow plow, do not add one to your vehicle. If your
vehicle has the snow plow option called RPO VYU
(snow plow prep package), then the payload
your vehicle can carry will be reduced when a snow
plow is installed. Your vehicle can be damaged if
either the front or rear axle ratings or the gross
vehicle weight (GVW) are exceeded.
Q: How do I know if my vehicle can handle a
snow plow?
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving on
page 4-22.
A: Some vehicles are built with a special package,
called RPO VYU (snow plow prep package). If
your vehicle has this option, you can add a plow to
it, provided certain weights, such as the weights
on the vehicle’s axles and the GVW, are not
exceeded.
4-57
Q: How heavy can a snow plow safely be?
A: The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many
things, such as:
• The options your vehicle came with, and the weight
of those options.
• The weight and number of passengers you intend
to carry.
• The weight of items you have added to your
vehicle.
• The total weight of any additional cargo you intend
to carry.
Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg) snow
plow. The total weight of all occupants and cargo
inside the cab should not exceed 300 lb (135 kg).
This means that you may only be able to carry
one passenger. But, even this may be too much
if you have got other equipment already adding
to the weight of your vehicle.
Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow
plow on your vehicle:
• Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles
does not exceed the axle rating for each.
• For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers must
be carried, appropriate counter ballast must be
installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast must
be properly secured so it will not move during driving.
• Follow the snow plow manufacturer’s
recommendations regarding rear ballast. Rear
ballast may be required to ensure a proper front and
rear weight distribution ratio, even though the actual
weight at the front axle may be less than the front
axle rating.
• The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist
you in determining the amount of rear ballast
required, to help make sure your snowplow/vehicle
combination does not exceed the GVW rating, the
front and rear axle ratings, and the front and rear
weight distribution ratio.
• The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating.
4-58
Q: What is front axle reserve capacity, and how do
I calculate it?
A: Front axle reserve capacity is the difference
In order to calculate the amount of weight any front
accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front
axle, use the following formula:
between your front gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
and the front axle weight of your vehicle with full
fuel and passengers. Basically, it is the amount of
weight you can add to your front axle before
reaching your front GAWR.
The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be
found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
label, as shown.
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding
to the front axle.
United States
Canada
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the
front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
4-59
For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow
actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the front
axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft (122 cm)
in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft
(305 cm), then:
W = 700 lb (318 kg)
A = 4 ft (122 cm)
W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 =
980 lbs (445 kg)
So, if your vehicle’s front axle reserve capacity is more
than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add the snow plow
without exceeding the front GAWR.
Q: What if I want to add heavier equipment to my
vehicle?
A: You can add heavier equipment on the front of the
vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer
passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo
towards the rear. This has the effect of reducing the
load on the front. However, the front GAWR, rear
GAWR and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
must never be exceeded.
4-60
{CAUTION:
On some vehicles equipped with certain front
mounted equipment, such as a snow plow, it
may be possible to load the front axle to the
front GAWR but not have enough weight on
the rear axle to have proper braking
performance. If your brakes can not work
properly, you could have a crash. To help your
brakes work properly when a snow plow is
installed, always follow the snow plow
manufacturer or installer’s recommendation for
rear ballast to ensure a proper front and rear
weight distribution ratio, even though the
actual front weight may be less than the front
GAWR, and the total vehicle weight is less
than the GVWR. Maintaining a proper front and
rear weight distribution ratio is necessary to
provide proper braking performance.
Q: What is total vehicle reserve capacity?
A: This is the difference between your GVWR and the
weight of your vehicle with full fuel and passengers.
It is the amount of weight you can add to your
vehicle before reaching your GVWR. Keep in mind
that reserve capacity numbers are intended as
a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or
cargo your vehicle can carry. If you are unsure
of your vehicle’s front, rear, or total weight, go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your
dealer can also help you with this.
Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package
also have an emergency roof lamp provision package,
RPO TRW. Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is
provided in the B-pillar as shown. See Auxiliary Roof
Mounted Lamp on page 3-18 for switch location.
The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle
can be found in the lower right corner of the
Certification/Tire label as shown previously.
See your dealer for additional advice and information
about using a snow plow on your vehicle. Also,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
A. Body Side Inner Panel
B. Emergency Roof Lamp Harness
4-61
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,
towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing”, following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-42.
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, the transmission could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-62
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles (NR4 and NP8)
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 or All-Wheel
Drive with StabiliTrak® on page 2-32 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position
for your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
6. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the
towing vehicle.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
7. Turn the ignition off.
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
4-63
Dolly Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with the
rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles can be towed on a dolly
with the front wheels on the ground provided that the
wheels are straight and the steering column has
been locked.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, it is not
designed to be dolly towed. If you need to tow your
vehicle, see “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
If your vehicle is not equipped with StabiliTrak®, use the
following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Drive the vehicle up onto the tow dolly.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow dolly.
4-64
Level Control
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-28 or All-Wheel Drive
with StabiliTrak® on page 2-32 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for
your vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the
towing vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition off and lock the steering column.
Automatic Level Control
The automatic level control rear suspension is available
on C/K 1500 vehicles and comes as a part of the
Autoride® suspension, if equipped.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and
will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to
ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned off.
You may hear the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
If a self-equalizing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
4-65
Autoride®
Trailer Recommendations
®
If equipped, the Autoride feature will provide a superior
vehicle ride and handling under a variety of passenger
and loading conditions.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
Autoride® also interacts with the tow/haul switch that,
when engaged, will provide additional control of the
shock absorbers. This additional control results in better
ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
page 3-54 for more information.
4-66
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR) for your vehicle. CWR is the
maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It
doesn’t include the weight of the people inside. But you
can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total
cargo load must not be more than your vehicle’s CWR.
Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you
won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-67.
Towing a Trailer
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
Break-In on page 2-19 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
To identify the vehicle trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of the
Trailer” that appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in acceleration, braking, handling, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
4-67
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
4-68
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in
this section.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The weight on your vehicle’s tires
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the
Tow/Haul mode is to:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a button at the end
of the shift lever which, when pressed, enables
tow/haul. Your vehicle may be equipped with Autoride®
which further improves your vehicle’s ride while
towing. See Autoride® on page 4-66 for more
information. When the button is pressed, a light on the
instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that
Tow/Haul has been selected. Tow/Haul may be turned
off by pressing the button again, at which time the
indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off. The
vehicle will automatically turn off Tow/Haul every
time it is started.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
See Weight of the Trailer later in this section. Tow/Haul is
most useful under the following driving conditions:
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in busy parking lots where improved low speed
control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul
is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load.
4-69
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Use one of the following charts to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle
model and options.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Vehicle*
C-1500 (2WD)*
4800 V8
5300 V8
5300 V8
(Extended Models)
Vehicle*
K-1500 (4WD)*
4800 V8
5300 V8
5300 V8
(Extended Models)
4-70
Axle Ratio
3.23
3.73
3.23
3.73
3.42
4.10
Axle Ratio
3.42
4.10
3.42
4.10
3.42
4.10
Maximum Trailer Weight
5,700 lbs
6,700 lbs
6,700 lbs
7,700 lbs
7,400 lbs
8,400 lbs
(2 585 kg)
(3 039 kg)
(3 039 kg)
(3 492 kg)
(3 356 kg)
(3 810 kg)
Maximum Trailer Weight
6,500 lbs
7,500 lbs
7,500 lbs
7,800 lbs
7,200 lbs
8,200 lbs
(2 948 kg)
(3 402 kg)
(3 402 kg)
(3 538 kg)
(3 265 kg)
(3 719 kg)
GCWR
11,000 lbs
12,000 lbs
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
(4 990 kg)
(5 443 kg)
(5 443 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
GCWR
12,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
13,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
(5 443 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(5 897 kg)
(6 350 kg)
Vehicle*
C-2500 (2WD)*
6000 V8
(Extended Models)
6000 V8 w/4WS
8100 V8
(Extended Models)
Vehicle*
K-2500 (4WD)*
6000 V8
(Extended Models)
6000 V8 w/4WS
8100 V8
Axle Ratio
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
Axle Ratio
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
Maximum Trailer Weight
7,900 lbs
9,900 lbs
7,700 lbs
9,700 lbs
10,600 lbs
12,000 lbs
(3 583 kg)
(4 490 kg)
(3 493 kg)
(4 400 kg)
(4 808 kg)
(5 443 kg)
Maximum Trailer Weight
7,600 lbs
9,600 lbs
7,400 lbs
9,400 lbs
10,300 lbs
12,000 lbs
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle
should not be exceeded.
(3 447 kg)
(4 354 kg)
(3 357 kg)
(4 264 kg)
(4 672 kg)
(5 443 kg)
GCWR
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
19,000 lbs
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
(8 618 kg)
GCWR
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
14,000 lbs
16,000 lbs
17,000 lbs
19,000 lbs
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(6 350 kg)
(7 257 kg)
(7 711 kg)
(8 618 kg)
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at the address listed
in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
4-71
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle for more
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum or 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a
maximum of 1,000 lbs (453 kg) for the 1500 series
and up to a maximum of 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for the
2500 series with a weight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This
will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on
the rear axle.
After you have loaded the trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them
right by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-72
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52 for more
information. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight
of the trailer tongue. If you use a weight distributing
hitch, make sure you don’t go over the rear axle
limit before you apply the weight distribution spring bars.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch.
(A) Body to Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample
room when turning to avoid contact between the
trailer and the bumper.
4-73
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer
will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
You should always attach safety chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains
under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch.
If you are towing a trailer up to 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) with
a factory-installed step bumper, you may attach the
safety chains to the attaching points on the bumper. If
you are towing a trailer up to your vehicle’s trailer rating
limit, you may attach the safety chains to the attaching
point on the hitch platform. If you are towing with
an aftermarket hitch, following the trailer or hitch
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
4-74
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, your trailer
cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system.
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inches (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid
to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.
If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel
brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-39. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Climate Control System
on page 3-21.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-75
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
If your vehicle is equipped with four-wheel steering and
if you use it while backing your trailer the same rules
apply. However, with four-wheel steering your rig
will respond more quickly and it may take additional
practice to get used to backing up with four-wheel
steering.
4-76
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g.,
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
earlier in this section for more information.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brake, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
4-77
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in NEUTRAL.
6. Release the regular brakes.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four-wheel-drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-78
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
harnesses for towing a trailer.
Basic Trailer Wiring
The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector,
is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
the vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be
plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer
connector available through your dealer.
4-79
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness
Package
The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed**
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
**If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,
turn on the headlamps to boost the vehicle system
voltage and properly charge the battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin
universal trailer connector is attached to a bracket on
the hitch platform.
4-80
Electric Brake Control Jumper
{CAUTION:
Be sure to use only the correct trailer brake
harness, the one intended for use on your
vehicle. If you use some other trailer brake
harness, even if it seems to fit, your trailer
brakes may not work at all. You could have a
crash in which you or others could be injured.
Use only the trailer brake harness intended for
your vehicle. If it is no longer available to you,
be sure to get a proper replacement from
your dealer.
This harness is included with your vehicle as part of the
heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
This harness is for an electric brake controller and
includes a trailer battery feed fuse. It should be installed
by your dealer or a qualified service center.
This harness is new for your vehicle, and you will not be
able to use a harness from an earlier model year.
4-81
Four-Wire Harness Adapter
This adapter is included
with your vehicle as part of
the heavy-duty trailer
wiring package.
Use this adapter to connect a standard four-way
round pin connector to the seven-wire harness on
your vehicle.
4-82
Connect the adapter with the tab pointing up (see
arrow). The flip cap on the vehicle’s seven-wire harness
will lock onto the tab and help hold the adapter in
place. Plug the four-way round pin connector onto
the adapter.
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only
use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored.
Step-Bumper Pad
Your vehicle has a rear step bumper with a rear step
pad at the center of the bumper.
If you will be using the
bumper to tow a trailer,
and your step-bumper has
three cutout circles you
must push out the center
cutout circle to install
the trailer ball.
If your step-bumper has only one cutout circle, you will
have to cut out the circle, then remove it to install
the trailer ball.
4-83
✍ NOTES
4-84
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol) .................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-8
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-16
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-21
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-23
Engine Coolant .............................................5-26
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-28
Engine Overheating .......................................5-28
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-30
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-35
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-37
Brakes ........................................................5-38
Battery ........................................................5-41
Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-47
Rear Axle .......................................................5-48
Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-49
Front Axle ......................................................5-50
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-52
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-52
Headlamps ..................................................5-52
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps .........................................5-53
Side Identification Marker Lamps .....................5-54
Roof Marker Lamps ......................................5-55
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-57
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-58
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-59
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ..............................................................5-60
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-61
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-64
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-66
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-67
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-70
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-71
Buying New Tires .........................................5-72
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-74
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-74
Tire Chains ..................................................5-76
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-77
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-78
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-79
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-83
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-89
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-92
Spare Tire ...................................................5-97
Appearance Care ............................................5-97
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-98
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-99
Leather ......................................................5-100
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces .................................................5-100
5-2
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-101
Weatherstrips .............................................5-101
Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-101
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-101
Finish Care ................................................5-102
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .......5-102
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............5-103
Tires .........................................................5-104
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-104
Finish Damage ...........................................5-104
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-104
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-104
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-105
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-106
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-106
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-106
Electrical System ..........................................5-107
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-107
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-107
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-107
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-107
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-108
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..............5-110
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-111
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-116
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-82.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Gasoline
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-106.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z
only), you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E-85);
also see Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-6. In all
other engines, use only regular unleaded gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-48. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives that
will help correct and prevent most deposit-related
problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM
dealer for service.
Fuel E-85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-106.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z
only), you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E-85);
also see Fuel on page 5-5. In all other engines, including
the 5.3L V8 (VIN Code T), use only regular unleaded
gasoline.
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine
(VIN Code Z) may use 85% ethanol fuel (E-85).
General Motors encourages the use of E-85 in vehicles
that are designed to use it. The ethanol in E-85 is a
“renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from renewable
sources such as corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E-85) pump available. The U. S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(http://www.afdc.doe.gov/refueling_mapsite.shtml) that
can help you find E-85 fuel. Those stations that do have
E-85 should have a label indicating ethanol content.
Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than
85%. Your vehicle may not operate properly if the
ethanol content is greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E-85 should meet
ASTM Specification D 5798.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E-85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E-85, it may be because your E-85 fuel is
not properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel
tank may improve starting. Your vehicle is designed to
accommodate a mixture of gasoline and E-85 fuel.
For good starting and heater efficiency below 32°F
(0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no
more than 70% ethanol.
E-85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you
will need to refill your fuel tank more often when
using E-85 than when you are using gasoline. Regular
unleaded gasoline is recommended when pulling a
trailer. For payload capacity with ethanol fuel, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E-85 fuel and may harm your fuel system. Damage
caused by additives would not be covered by
your new vehicle warranty. Do not use additives
with E-85 fuel.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
5-8
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the
last turn as you loosen it.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-101.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on
the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is
fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-48.
The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-60 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-48.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle with this
symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle to the lower left
of the steering wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on
the secondary hood release located near the
center of the grille.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull down the hood and close
it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 5300 V8 engine (VORTEC™ 4800 and 6000 V8 engines similar), here
is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 5-30 and Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap on page 5-28.
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking the
Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 5-23.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 5-30.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See Jump
Starting on page 5-42.
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-38.
L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-111.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.
5-13
When you open the hood on the VORTEC™ 8100 V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 5-30 and Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap on page 5-28.
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking the
Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 5-23.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-16.
G. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 5-30.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See Jump
Starting on page 5-42.
I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
K. Brake Master Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-38.
L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-111.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.
5-15
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
instrument cluster, it means you need to check
your engine oil level right away.
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
For more information, see CHECK OIL LEVEL under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-16
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
8.1L Engine
All Except 8.1L Engine
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-116.
5-17
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
5-18
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the oil
is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter
must be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained
service people who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-19
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, reset
the system.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, see
“Engine Oil Life System” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-57 for vehicles equipped with the
DIC, or do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for
10 seconds, the system is resetting.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still does
not reset, see your dealer for service.
5-20
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter and
the air filter restriction
indicator, if equipped.
On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
If your vehicle is equipped with an air filter restriction
indicator, it lets you know when the engine air
cleaner/filter needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a
restriction indicator, you should inspect the air filter
restriction indicator at every oil change and replace
the engine air cleaner/filter when the indicator tells
you to.
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air
cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator turns black or
is in the red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and
reset the indicator. See the steps following to replace
the engine air cleaner/filter and to reset the air filter
restriction indicator.
Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle using the steps following.
When you have the engine air cleaner/filter removed,
lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the
engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
5-21
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly on the front
corner of the engine compartment on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
2. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing and
lift up the cover.
5-22
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if equipped,
by pressing the top button on the indicator.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
5-23
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle with this graphic is
located at the rear of
the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
5-24
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If
inconsistent readings persist, check the transmission
breather hose to be sure it is clean and unclogged. If
readings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-25
Engine Coolant
What to Use
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-26
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark.
If your vehicle is equipped with a low coolant sensor
and the LOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes
on and stays on, it means you are low on engine
coolant. See “LOW COOLANT LEVEL” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-60.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
5-27
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-46.
In addition, you will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED,
and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER message in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument
panel. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60.
5-28
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-30 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-30 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant condition,
can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-67.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try
this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn it off.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is
equipped with an engine-driven cooling fan, push down
the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice
as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes
while you are parked.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is
equipped with an electric cooling fan, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-29
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In
this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-16.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
8100 V8 Engines
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
5-30
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
All Other Engines
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface. Check the coolant
level after the system cools down. Some amount of
coolant may be lost due to overheating.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
5-31
The coolant level should
be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in
the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-32
If your vehicle is equipped with an electric engine
cooling fan, check the coolant temperature gage. If the
coolant temperature is approximately 232°F (111°C),
the electric cooling fan should be running. If it is
not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
If your vehicle is equipped with an engine-driven cooling
fan, start the engine again and see if the fan speed
increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the
accelerator pedal down. If it does not, your vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-30 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
Engine Coolant on page 5-26 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant
surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-33
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark.
5-34
Engine Fan Noise
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
If your vehicle is equipped with a clutched engine
cooling fan, when the clutch is engaged, the fan spins
faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In
most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning
slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves
fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy
vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside
temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch
more fully engages, so you may hear an increase in fan
noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as
the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It
is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The
fan will slow down when additional cooling is not
required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
If your vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, you
may hear the fans spinning at low speed during most
everyday driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is
required. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,
and/or high outside temperatures, or if you are operating
your air conditioning system, the fans change to high
speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and indicates that the cooling system is
functioning properly. The fans will change to low speed
when additional cooling is no longer required.
5-35
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5-36
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message that
comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is
displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition
cycle. When the CHECK WASHER FLUID message is
displayed, you will need to add washer fluid to the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-37
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
5-38
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it
is not, have your brake
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-13.
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind
of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-97.
5-39
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-40
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for battery
location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
5-41
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you
may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following
steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
5-42
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in PARK (P) before setting the parking
brake. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, not
in NEUTRAL.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located behind a
red plastic cover, if equipped, near the engine
accessory drive bracket. To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic cover, if
equipped.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on
the engine drive bracket, or on the thermostat
housing on the 8.1L engine. It is marked
GND (Ground).
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the
remote positive (+) and remote negative (−)
terminals.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-43
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-44
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable to the remote
negative (−) terminal,
marked GND, on
the vehicle with the
dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-45
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover, if
equipped, to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-46
All-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
All-Wheel Drive Transfer Case (A) Fill Plug
(B) Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
5-47
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
1500 Series shown, 2500 similar
5-48
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
• The proper level for the 1500 Series is from
5/8 inch to 1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
• The proper level for the 2500 Series is from
0 to 1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
• The proper level for the 1500 and 2500 series
vehicles with QUADRASTEER™ (4-Wheel Steer) is
from 0 to 1/4 inch (0 to 6 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. There are two additional systems that need
lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
5-49
How to Check Lubricant
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Automatic Transfer Case
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
5-50
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant:
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 0 to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) below
the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-51
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-58.
To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
2. Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp
assembly. To remove them, turn the outer pin
outward and pull it straight up. To remove the inner
pin, turn it inward and pull it straight up.
5-52
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
A. Low-Beam Headlamp
B. High-Beam Headlamp
3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector.
5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it from
the headlamp assembly.
6. Put the new bulb into the headlamp assembly and
turn it clockwise until it is tight. Use care not to
touch the bulb with your fingers or hands.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
9. Install and turn the two pins into the locking feature.
A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Retainer Clip
C. Front Turn
Signal Lamp
D. Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
To replace a front turn signal, sidemarker or DRL bulb,
do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly as described
previously. See Headlamps on page 5-52 for
more information.
5-53
9. Reinstall the turn signal assembly back into the
vehicle placing the hook and posts on the inner side
into the alignment holes first, then the outer side into
the retainer bracket until you hear a click.
10. Reinstall the headlamp assembly.
Side Identification Marker Lamps
To replace a side identification marker bulb, do
the following:
1. Locate the lamp gasket near the rear wheel to
expose the service slot and pull back the edge.
2. Using a flat tool, push into the slot to release the
lamp housing.
3. Press the retainer clip (B), located behind the turn
signal assembly, towards the outside of the vehicle.
4. Pull the turn signal assembly out of the vehicle.
5. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from the turn signal
assembly.
6. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
7. Install a new bulb into the bulb socket.
8. Insert the bulb socket into the turn signal assembly
and turn it clockwise until it locks.
5-54
3. Pull the housing out to expose the wiring harness
and connector.
4. Unplug the lamp assembly harness from the
housing.
5. Unplug the lamp.
6. Put in a new lamp and snap it into the housing.
7. Reinstall the lamp housing.
Roof Marker Lamps
To replace a roof marker lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Remove the two
screws and lift off
the lens.
2. Remove the six screws on the center roof
marker lamps.
3. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise to remove it
from the socket.
5-55
4. Put a new bulb into the
socket and turn
clockwise until it locks
in place.
5. Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws.
5-56
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the
two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
2. Remove the taillamp assembly.
3. Press the release tab, if equipped, and turn the
socket counterclockwise to remove it from the
taillamp housing.
5-57
4. Pull the old bulb
straight out from the
socket.
5. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert the socket
into the taillamp housing and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp housing until it clicks.
6. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
5-58
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Front Roof Marker Lamp
Front Parking and Turn Lamp
Headlamps
High-Beam
Low-Beam
Rear Marker Lamp, Taillamp and
Stoplamp
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
Bulb Number
3157
4114K
194
3457A
9005
9006
3157
3157
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-15.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-59
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
5-60
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-52.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-73.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-66 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
5-61
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can
be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-52.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall.
5-62
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed
to support that load when used as a single. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66 and Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-52.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of a
tire size.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the
light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire. The
load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
5-63
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66.
5-64
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to
279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of
a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-66 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-71.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
5-65
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-73.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-52.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
5-66
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door lock post (striker). This label lists your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and their recommended cold tire
inflation pressures. The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s
maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-52.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. For additional information
regarding the spare tire, see Spare Tire on page 5-97.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s
inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. If
your vehicle has this feature, sensors are mounted
on each tire and wheel assembly, except the spare tire.
The TPM sensors transmit tire pressure readings to
a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPM
system will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC); and at the same time illuminate the low
tire pressure warning symbol. For additional information
and details about the DIC operation and displays see
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-57 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-60.
5-67
When the tire pressure
monitoring system warning
light is lit, one or more
of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as specified in the
vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
The Tire and Loading Information label (tire information
placard) shows the size of your vehicle’s original
tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires when they are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-66. For the location of the tire and loading
information label, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-52.
5-68
Your vehicle’s TPM system can alert you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-70 and Tires on page 5-60.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle is
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
sensors.
TPM Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPM sensor has a unique identification code. Any
time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPM sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
Each tire/wheel position is matched to a sensor, by
increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: left front (LF), right front (RF),
right rear (RR) and left rear (LR).
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the
matching process stops and you will need to start over.
The TPM sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off.
3. Turn the exterior lamp switch from Off to On four
times within 3 seconds. A double horn chirp will
sound and the TPM low tire warning light will begin
to flash. The double horn chirp and flashing
TPM warning light indicate that the TPM matching
process has started. The TPM warning light
should continue flashing throughout the matching
procedure. The SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
message will be displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
4. Start with the left (driver’s side) front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPM sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
then stop and listen for a single horn chirp.
The single horn chirp should sound within
15 seconds, confirming that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this tire and wheel
position. If you do not hear the confirming single
horn chirp, you will need to start over with step
number one. To let air-pressure out of a tire you can
use the pointy end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage or a key.
6. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) front tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the right (passenger’s side) rear tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the left (driver’s side) rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the left
rear tire, check to see if the TPM warning light is
still flashing. If yes, turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems
The spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. If you
replace one of the road tires with the spare, the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed on the
DIC screen. This message should go off once you
re-install the road tire containing the TPM sensor. The
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message is displayed
when the TPM system is malfunctioning. One or more
missing or inoperable TPM sensors will cause the
service tire monitor message to be displayed. See your
dealer for service.
5-69
Federal Communications Commission and
Industry and Science Canada
The TPM system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry and Science Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-71 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-74 for more information.
5-70
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading
information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-52 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-66,
for more information. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-116.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-78.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-71
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-52 for more information about these labels and
where they can be found on your vehicle.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new
had a Tire Performance Criteria Specifications
(TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you
get new tires, GM recommends that you get tires
with that same TPC Spec number. That way your
vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to
give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, load
range, traction, ride, tire pressure monitoring system
performance and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
Whenever you replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
If you replace your vehicle’s tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, the tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning.
5-72
Non-TPC Spec tires may give a low pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec numbered tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a different
size spare than the road tires (those originally
installed on your vehicle). When new, your
vehicle included a spare tire and wheel
assembly with a similar overall diameter as
your vehicle’s road tires and wheels, so it is all
right to drive on it. Because this spare was
developed for use on your vehicle, it will not
affect vehicle handling.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
5-73
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
one way or the other, the alignment may need to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-74
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
5-75
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P265/75R16, LT265/75R16,
P265/70R16 or P265/70R17 size tires, don’t use
tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there’s not enough clearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
5-76
Notice: If you have a tire size other than
P265/75R16, LT265/75R16, P265/70R16 or
P265/70R17 use tire chains only where legal
and only when you must. Use chains that are the
proper size for your tires. Install them on the
rear tires only.
Don’t use chains on the front tires.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would;
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-77
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
(Continued)
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION:
5-78
CAUTION:
(Continued)
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Tahoe Rear Access Panel
D. Wheel Blocks
A. Retaining Bracket
E. Jack
and Wing Nut
F. Knob
B. Tool Kit and
Jack Tools
C. Wing Nut Holding
Tire Blocks
5-79
On the Tahoe, the equipment is located behind the left
trim panel in the rear of the vehicle. Unlatch the
release lever to open the trim panel door. Skip the first
step and follow the last three.
On the Suburban, the equipment you will need is under
the storage tray in the left trim panel.
1. Remove the tray to access the tools.
2. Remove the wing nut used to retain the tool kit by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to
release the jack from its holder and to lower the
jack head.
4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
Suburban
F. Mounting Bracket
Knob
G. Wing Nut Holding
Removable Tray
Tire Blocks
Retaining Hook
H. Wheel Blocks
Retaining Bracket
I. Jack
and Wing Nut
E. Tool Kit and
Jack Tools
A.
B.
C.
D.
5-80
You will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and
use the ignition key to remove the lock if your
vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock (J).
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack
handle extensions (I) as shown.
A. Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Hoist Lock
(If Equipped)
5-81
3. Insert the hoist end
(open end) (F) of the
extension through
the hole (G) in the rear
bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects to
the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the
extension is used to lower the spare tire.
4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
not to lower. See Secondary Latch System on
page 5-89.
5-82
5. Use the wheel wrench
hook that allows you
to pull the hoist
cable towards you to
assist in reaching
the spare tire.
6. Tilt the retainer (D) at
the end of the cable
when the tire has been
lowered, so it can
be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end of
the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently prying the cap out.
If the wheel has bolt-on wheel covers, loosen the
plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench
in a counterclockwise direction. If needed, finish
loosening them by hand. The nut caps will not come
off. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry
along the edge of the cover until it comes off.
5-83
Notice: If your vehicle has QUADRASTEER™ and
you use a jack to raise the vehicle without
positioning it correctly, you could damage the
QUADRASTEER™ system. When raising your
vehicle on a jack, avoid contact with tie rods and tie
rod boots.
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise
to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel
nuts yet.
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
5-84
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
3. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
Front Position
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (C)
and only one jack handle extension (D). Attach
the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension.
Attach the jack handle to the jack. Position the jack
on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame
sections overlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise
to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough
off the ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to clear the ground.
5-85
4. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
Rear Position – 1500
Series
Rear Position – 2500
Series
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the
vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (C)
and both jack handle extensions (D). Attach
the wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions.
Attach the jack handle to the jack. Use the jacking
pad provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel
wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is
enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground.
5-86
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
5. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
6. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the
wheel after mounting
the spare.
7. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel
is held against the hub.
8. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
5-87
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-116 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-116 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
5-88
9. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the either the center cap, or bolt-on hub
cap, depending on what your vehicle is equipped
with. For center caps, place the cap on the wheel and
tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel.
The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up the
tab on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel.
For bolt-on hub caps, align the plastic nut caps with
the wheel nuts and then tighten by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,
the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on
page 5-92.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do
the following:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
If the cable is not
visible proceed
to Step 6.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks
or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on
page 5-79.
5-89
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom edge
of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the
rear bumper.
5-90
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn
the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the
spare the rest of the way.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
5-91
14. Tilt the retainer (D) at
the end of the cable
and pull it through
the wheel opening.
Pull the tire out
from under the vehicle.
15. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-83.
5-92
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up may damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve
stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier. Use the art and text following to help you:
A. Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear.
2. Tilt the retainer (D)
downward and through
the wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer
is fully seated across
the underside of
the wheel.
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Hoist Lock
(If Equipped)
5-93
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You
cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I)
together.
4. Insert the hoist end (F)
through the hole (G) in
the rear bumper
and into the
hoist shaft.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock (if equipped).
5-94
To store the tools, follow these procedures:
For Tahoe, do the following:
1. Put the tool kit, with the jack tools, in the tool bag
and place in the retaining clip above the jack.
2. Tighten down with the wing nut.
3. Assemble the wheel chocks and jack together with
the wing nut and retaining hook.
4. Position behind the jack storage cover in the left
rear side panel and tighten, adjusting clockwise
until the jack is secured tight in the mounting
bracket. Be sure to position the holes in the base of
the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket.
For Suburban, do the following:
1. Return the tool kit, with the jack tools, to the
tool bag.
2. Assemble wheel chocks and jack together with the
wing nut and retaining hook.
3. Position under the jack storage tray in the left rear
side panel below the wheelbase and tighten,
adjusting clockwise until the jack is secured tight in
the mounting bracket. Be sure to position the
holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the
mounting bracket.
4. Use the retaining clip to fasten the tool kit on the
stud in the storage compartment in the rear left
trim panel and turn the wing nut clockwise to
secure.
5. Return the storage tray.
5-95
Tahoe Rear Access Panel
D. Wheel Blocks
A. Retaining Bracket
E. Jack
and Wing Nut
F. Knob
B. Tool Kit and
Jack Tools
C. Wing Nut Holding
Tire Blocks
5-96
Suburban
F. Mounting Bracket
Knob
G. Wing Nut Holding
Removable Tray
Tire Blocks
Retaining Hook
H. Wheel Blocks
Retaining Bracket
I. Jack
and Wing Nut
E. Tool Kit and
Jack Tools
A.
B.
C.
D.
Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-66 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-83 and Storing
a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-92.
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires-those originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for use on your
vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. If your vehicle has
four-wheel drive and the smaller spare is installed,
keep the vehicle in two-wheel drive as much as possible.
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match
your vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and
type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
5-97
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
5-98
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-99
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
5-100
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-105.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-101.
5-101
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-105.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
5-102
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
5-103
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
5-104
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
5-105
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box. It
is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On
this label, you will find the following:
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-106
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-82.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
5-107
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access
door is on the driver’s side
edge of the instrument
panel. Pull off the cover to
access the fuse block.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse
block access door. These can be used to replace a bad
fuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
Fuses
RR WPR
SEO ACCY
WS WPR
TBC ACCY
IGN 3
4WD
5-108
Usage
Rear Window Wiper Switch
Special Equipment Option
Accessory
Windshield Wipers
Truck Body Controller
Accessory
Ignition, Heated Seats
Four-Wheel Drive System,
Auxiliary Battery
Fuses
HTR A/C
LOCK
HVAC 1
L DOOR
CRUISE
UNLOCK
RR FOG LP
BRAKE
DRIVER UNLOCK
IGN 0
TBC IGN 0
VEH CHMSL
LT TRLR ST/TRN
Usage
Climate Control System
Power Door Lock Relay
(Lock Function)
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Climate Control System
Driver’s Door Harness
Connection
Cruise Control
Power Door Lock Relay
(Unlock Function)
Rear Fog Lamp (Export Only)
Anti-Lock Brake System
Power Door Lock Relay
(Driver’s Door Unlock
Function)
PCM, TCM
Truck Body Controller
Vehicle and Trailer High
Mounted Stoplamp
Left Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
Fuses
LT TRN
VEH STOP
RT TRLR ST/TRN
RT TRN
BODY
DDM
AUX PWR 2
LOCKS
ECC
TBC 2C
FLASH
CB LT DOORS
TBC 2B
TBC 2A
Usage
Left Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Vehicle Stoplamps, Brake
Module, Electronic Throttle
Control Module
Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
Right Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Harness Connector
Driver Door Module
Rear Cargo Area Power
Outlets
Power Door Lock System
Rear Electronic Climate
Control, Liftgate
Truck Body Controller
Flasher Module
Left Power Window Circuit
Breaker
Truck Body Controller
Truck Body Controller
5-109
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
Device
SEO
TRAILER
UPFIT
SL RIDE
HDLR 2
BODY
DEFOG
HDLNR 1
SPARE RELAY
CB SEAT
CB RT DOOR
SPARE
INFO
5-110
Usage
Special Equipment Option
Trailer Brake Wiring
Upfitter (Not Used)
Ride Control Harness
Connection
Headliner Wiring Connector
Body Wiring Connector
Rear Defogger Relay
Headliner Wiring Connector 1
Not Used
Driver and Passenger Seat
Module Circuit Breaker
Right Power Window Circuit
Breaker
Not Used
Infotainment Harness
Connection
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment
on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the battery.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on its location.
5-111
5-112
*1 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #2.
*4 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
Fuses
VSES/ECAS
IGN A
IGN B
*5 — PCM Ignition
LBEC 1
*2 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #1.
*3 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
Fuses
GLOW PLUG
CUST FEED
HYBRID
STUD #1
MBEC
BLOWER
LBEC
STUD 2
ABS
Usage
Not Used
Gasoline Accessory Power
Hybrid
Auxiliary Power
(Single Battery and Diesels
Only)/Dual Battery (TP2)
Do not install fuse.
Mid Bussed Electrical Center
Power Feed, Front Seats,
Right Doors
Front Climate Control Fan
Left Bussed Electrical
Center, Door Modules,
Door Locks, Auxiliary Power
Outlet — Rear Cargo Area
and Instrument Panel
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Brake Feed
Anti-Lock Brakes
TRL PARK
RR PARK
LR PARK
PARK LP
STRTR
INTPARK
STOP LP
TBC BATT
S/ROOF
SEO B2
4WS
RR HVAC
AUX PWR
Usage
Vehicle Stability
Ignition Power
Ignition Power
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Left Doors, Truck Body
Controller, Flasher Module
Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
Right Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
Left Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
Parking Lamps Relay
Starter Relay
Interior Lamps
Stoplamps
Truck Body Controller Battery
Feed
Sunroof
Off-Road Lamps
Vent Solenoid
Canister/Quadrasteer Module
Power
Rear Climate Control
Auxiliary Power
Outlet — Console
5-113
Fuses
IGN 1
PCM 1
ETC/ECM
IGN E
RTD
TRL B/U
PCM B
F/PMP
B/U LP
RR DEFOG
HDLP-HI
PRIME
AIRBAG
FRT PARK
DRL
5-114
Usage
Ignition Relay
Powertrain Control Module
Electronic Throttle Control,
Electronic Brake Controller
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Air Conditioning Relay,
Turn Signal/Hazard Switch,
Starter Relay
Ride Control
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
Powertrain Control Module,
Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump (Relay)
Back-up Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
Rear Window Defogger
Headlamp High Beam Relay
Not Used
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System
Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
Daytime Running
Lamps (Relay)
Fuses
SEO IGN
TBC IGN1
HI HDLP - LT
LH HID
DRL
RVC
IPC/DIC
HVAC/ECAS
CIG LTR
HI HDLP - RT
HDLP - LOW
A/C COMP
A/C COMP
RR WPR
RADIO
SEO B1
LO HDLP - LT
BTSI
Usage
Rear Defog Relay
Truck Body Controller Ignition
High Beam Headlamp - Left
Not Used
Daytime Running Lamps
Regulated Voltage Control
Instrument Panel
Cluster/Driver Information
Center
Climate Control Controller
Cigarette Lighter
High Beam Headlamp - Right
Headlamp Low Beam Relay
Air Conditioning Compressor
Air Conditioning
Compressor Relay
Rear Wiper/Washer
Audio System
Mid Bussed Electrical Center,
HomeLink, Rear Heated
Seats
Headlamp Low Beam - Left
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System
Fuses
CRNK
LO HDLP - RT
FOG LP
FOG LP
HORN
HORN
W/S WASH
W/S WASH
INFO
RADIO AMP
RH HID
EAP
TREC
SBA
Usage
Starting System
Headlamp Low Beam - Right
Fog Lamp Relay
Fog Lamps
Horn Fuse
Horn Relay
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump Relay
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump
OnStar®/Rear Seat
Entertainment
Radio Amplifier
Not Used
Electric Adjustable Pedals
All-Wheel Drive Module
Supplemental Brake Assist
Auxiliary Electric Cooling Fan
Fuse Block
The auxiliary electric
cooling fan fuse block is
located in the engine
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle
next to the underhood
fuse block.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
Fuses
COOL/FAN
COOL/FAN
COOL/FAN
Usage
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan Relay Fuse
Cooling Fan Fuse
Relays
COOL/FAN 1
COOL/FAN 3
COOL/FAN 2
Usage
Cooling Fan Relay 1
Cooling Fan Relay 3
Cooling Fan Relay 2
5-115
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Cooling System — Automatic
4800 V8**
5300 V8**
6000 V8*
6000 V8**
8100 V8*
* Engine Fan Driven Cooling System
** Electric Cooling Fan System
Add 2.0 L (2.1 qt) if equipped with rear heating for all engines.
Engine Oil with Filter
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 6000 V8
8100 V8
5-116
Capacities
English
Metric
See refrigerant label located in the engine
compartment.
16.7 qt
16.7 qt
16.2 qt
16.8 qt
26.9 qt
15.8 L
15.8 L
15.3 L
15.9 L
25.5 L
6.0 qt†
6.5 qt†
5.7 L†
6.1 L†
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Fuel Tank
Tahoe
26.0 gal
Suburban (1500 Series)
31.0 gal
Suburban (2500 Series)
37.5 gal
Wheel Nut Torque
140 ft lb
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the
range.
98.4 L
117.3 L
140.0 L
190 Y
proper operating
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4800 V8
V
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5300 V8
T
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5300 V8
Z
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 6000 V8
U
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 8100 V8
G
Automatic
0.060 in (1.52 mm)
5-117
✍ NOTES
5-118
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................6-10
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-15
Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
6-2
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-52.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-22.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
6-3
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. An Emission Control
Service.
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-21. See footnote (l).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-70 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
page 6-10.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 5-21.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service). See
footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
•
Four-wheel drive: Change transfer case
fluid. See footnote (g).
•
•
•
Inspect evaporative control system. An
Emission Control Service. See
footnotes † and (k).
•
•
•
6-6
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(41 500)
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (m).
•
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage, and parking
brake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated
unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,
or they could be damaged.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
6-7
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job,
have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
6-8
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot
points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate
handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo
door hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-26 for
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check
that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist
you with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-26 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
6-9
At Least Once a Month
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Starter Switch Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-60 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-78.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-70.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-35.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
6-10
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-35.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
6-11
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-12
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM
Engine Oil
Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. To
determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine
Oil on page 5-16
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only
Engine Coolant water
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-26
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
System
Canada 89021186).
Usage
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Chassis
Lubrication
Front Axle
(Four-Wheel
Drive)
Front Axle
(All-Wheel
Drive)
Rear Axle
Rear Axle
(Steerable)
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052271, in
Canada 10950849).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) meeting GM
Specification 9986115.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) meeting GM
Specification 9986115.
Synthetic Axle Lubricant; use only
GM Part No. U.S. 12378557, in
Canada 88901362. Do not add
friction modifier.
6-13
Usage
Transfer Case
(All-Wheel
Drive with
StabiliTrak®)
Automatic
Transfer Case
(Four-Wheel
Drive)
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline or
One-Piece
Propshaft
Spline
(Two-Wheel
Drive with Auto.
Trans.)
6-14
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid (GM Part
No. U.S. 12378508, in
Canada 10953626).
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
Usage
Hood Hinges
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, Superlube (GM Part
No. U.S. 12371287, in
Canada 10953437).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part
Number
Engine Air Cleaner /Filter
High Capacity Filter
25313349
A1518C
Standard Filter
25313348*
A1519C*
4800 V8; 5300 V8; 6000 V8
88984215
PF46
8100 V8
25324052
PF454
Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
4800 V8; 5300 V8; 6000 V8
12571164
41–985
8100 V8
12578277
41–983
Front – 22 inches (56.0 cm)
15153642
—
Rear – 14 inches (35.0 cm)
22121329
—
Wiper Blades (ITTA Type)
*A1518C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ..........................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
7-4
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’s
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,
(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to
speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
representative.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
7-6
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
•
•
•
•
Telephone number of your location.
Location of the vehicle.
Model, year, color, and license plate number.
Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872), text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
new vehicles.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-7
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses may
be available, for up to a maximum of five days. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available, up to a five-day
maximum. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original receipts.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer.
7-8
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. If your
vehicle is equipped with Quadrasteer or StabiliTrak®,
steering performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel
angle, and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
General Motors. Please call the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
7-11
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-12
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-20
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ......... 4-57
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-82
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-107
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-22
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-21
Air Conditioning .............................. 3-21, 3-22, 3-25
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-40
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-39
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-68
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-82
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-75
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-78
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-82
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-75
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-76
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-73
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-71
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-47
All-Wheel Drive with StabiliTrak® ....................... 2-32
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-79
Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-138
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ..................................................... 3-138
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-45
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-97
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-103
Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-101
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-104
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-101
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-98
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-99
Finish Care ............................................... 5-102
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-104
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ............................................... 5-100
Leather .................................................... 5-100
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-104
Tires ........................................................ 5-104
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-104
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-105
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-101
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-101
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-102
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-21
1
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-78
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-79
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-135
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-136
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-137
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-137
Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-138
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-138
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 3-121
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-93
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-82
Radio with Six-Disc CD .............................. 3-108
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-133
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-79
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-78
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-134
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-136
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-138
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-16
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-23
Operation ................................................... 2-24
Autoride®™ .................................................... 4-66
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch ................. 3-18
2
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-41
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-20
Battery Warning Light ...................................... 3-42
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-42
Bench Seat .................................................... 1-16
Bench Seat Split (50/50) .................................. 1-11
Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ................................... 1-9
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-35
System Warning Light .................................. 3-43
Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-22
Brakes .......................................................... 5-38
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-19
Bucket Seats, Rear ......................................... 1-21
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................ 5-53
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
Headlamps ................................................. 5-52
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-58
Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-55
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Side Identification Marker Lamps ................... 5-54
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-57
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-72
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-116
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-14, 2-39, 4-45, 4-67
Care of
Safety Belts .............................................. 5-101
Your Cassette Tape Player .......................... 3-136
Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-137
Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-137
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-59
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-57
Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ............. 1-37
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-76
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-48
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-104
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-49
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-46
Child Restraints (cont.)
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-57
Older Children ............................................. 1-44
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-59
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 1-61
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ........................................... 1-59
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position ........................................... 1-63
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ........................................... 1-64
Top Strap ................................................... 1-54
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-55
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-52
Chime Level Adjustment ................................. 3-138
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-21
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-103
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-101
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-99
Finish Care ............................................... 5-102
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-98
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ............................................... 5-100
Leather .................................................... 5-100
Tires ........................................................ 5-104
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-104
3
Cleaning (cont.)
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-101
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-101
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-102
Climate Control System ................................... 3-21
Dual .......................................................... 3-22
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-25
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-30
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-31
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System,
Electronic ................................................ 3-34
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................ 3-30
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-41
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-17
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-58
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-46
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-23
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-28
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-53
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-56
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
4
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-10
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-19
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-18
Door
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-13
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-29
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-56
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-57
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-72
Driver Information Center (DIC) (cont.)
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-60
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-37
City ........................................................... 4-40
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-41
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-44
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-38
Off-Road .................................................... 4-22
Recovery Hooks .......................................... 4-51
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-50
Winter ........................................................ 4-45
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-25
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-22
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-122
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment .....................................
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block .............
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .........................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .......................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ....
Underhood Fuse Block ...............................
Windshield Wiper Fuses .............................
5-107
5-110
5-107
5-108
5-107
5-111
5-107
Electrical System (cont.)
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-21
Battery ....................................................... 5-41
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-48
Coolant ...................................................... 5-26
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-23
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-46
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-39
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-35
Oil ............................................................. 5-16
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-19
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-30
Overheating ................................................ 5-28
Starting ...................................................... 2-21
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-19
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-19
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-43
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-21
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-104
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................... 3-138
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-77
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-78
5
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-92
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-23
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-37
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-17
Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-28, 5-49
Four-Wheel-Drive Light .................................... 3-53
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-50
Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-19
Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-56
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
E-85 (85% Ethanol) ....................................... 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-8
Gage ......................................................... 3-54
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-55
Fuses
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-110
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-107
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-108
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-111
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-107
6
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-46
Fuel .......................................................... 3-54
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-52
Speedometer .............................................. 3-38
Tachometer ................................................. 3-38
Transmission Temperature ............................. 3-46
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-42
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-52
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-56
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-8
Headlamps ............................................ 3-14, 5-52
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-16
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-15
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................ 5-53
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Headlamps (cont.)
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-55
Side Identification Marker Lamps ................... 5-54
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-6
Heater ................................................... 3-21, 3-22
Heater ........................................................... 3-25
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-53
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-43
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-44
HomeLink® Wireless Control System ................. 2-52
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
Operation ................................................... 2-53
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-28
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-46
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-66
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-18
Cluster ....................................................... 3-37
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-5
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall ....................................
Lamps
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp ........................
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Dome ........................................................
Dome Lamp Override ...................................
Fog ...........................................................
Front Reading .............................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
5-61
3-18
3-20
3-18
3-19
3-17
3-19
1-57
1-59
7
Level Control .................................................. 4-65
Liftgate .......................................................... 2-14
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-39
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-45
Battery Warning .......................................... 3-42
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-43
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-53
Four-Wheel-Drive ......................................... 3-53
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-53
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-55
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-48
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-40
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-39
Security ..................................................... 3-53
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-48
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-54
Traction Off ................................................ 3-45
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-19
Exit ........................................................... 3-19
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-52
Locking Rear Axle ........................................... 4-10
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13
Locks
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
8
Locks (cont.)
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-13
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-21
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-55
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-57
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-5
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-15
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-48
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-15
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-61
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-60
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-43
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-41
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-41
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-48
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ........................ 2-46
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-49
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors ................... 2-49
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-49
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-46
Outside Power Camper-Type ......................... 2-47
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 2-48
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-47
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ..................................................... 3-121
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-19
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-15
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-38
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-38
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-22
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-19
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-16
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-52
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-19
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-44
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-50
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-30
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-48
Camper-Type Mirrors .................................... 2-46
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-49
Curb View Assist Mirrors .............................. 2-49
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-49
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-46
Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................... 2-48
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-47
Outside Power Camper-Type Mirror ................... 2-47
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-30
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
9
P
R
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-36
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-38
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-35
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-38
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-40
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-78
Passing ......................................................... 4-19
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-19
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-20
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ....................................... 5-107
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-5
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-21
Seat ............................................................ 1-4
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
Windows .................................................... 2-16
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-11
Radios .......................................................... 3-78
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-79
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-136
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-137
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-137
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 3-121
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-93
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-82
Radio with Six-Disc CD .............................. 3-108
Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-133
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-79
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-78
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-134
Understanding Reception ............................ 3-136
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ......... 3-31
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and
Electronic Climate Controls ........................... 3-34
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................... 3-30
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-48
Locking ...................................................... 4-10
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-13
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-41
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................. 3-133
Q
QUADRASTEER™ .......................................... 4-16
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-28
10
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-122
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-8
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-38
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-58
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-43
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ...................................................... 2-41
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-41
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-51
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-62
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-6
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-79
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-58
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-83
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-84
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-21
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-37
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-50
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-40
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-39
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 5-101
Center Passenger Position ............................ 1-37
Driver Position ............................................ 1-29
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-28
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-28
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ...................................... 1-41
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-38
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-37
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-43
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-36
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-23
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
50/50 Split Bench Seat ................................. 1-11
60/40 Split Bench Seat .................................. 1-9
Bench Seat ................................................ 1-16
Bucket Seats, Rear ...................................... 1-21
11
Seats (cont.)
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-8
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-6
Manual ........................................................ 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-61
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-5
Power Seats ................................................. 1-4
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-8
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-89
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-63
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-61
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-59
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-59
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-64
Security Light ................................................. 3-53
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-48
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-82
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ......... 3-79
Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ..... 3-78
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-104
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-36
12
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-38
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Snow Plow .................................................... 4-57
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-97
Installing .................................................... 5-83
Removing ................................................... 5-79
Storing ....................................................... 5-92
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-116
Speedometer .................................................. 3-38
Split Bench Seat (50/50) .................................. 1-11
Split Bench Seat (60/40) .................................... 1-9
StabiliTrak®, All-Wheel Drive ............................. 2-32
StabiliTrak® System ......................................... 4-11
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-21
Steering ........................................................ 4-14
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-135
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-57
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-58
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-56
Front Storage Area ...................................... 2-56
Glove Box .................................................. 2-56
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-57
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-58
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-50
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-17
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-60
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-38
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-57
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-134
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-17
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-17
Passlock® ................................................... 2-19
Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-22
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-48
Tires ............................................................. 5-60
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ............................................... 5-103
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-72
Chains ....................................................... 5-76
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-78
Cleaning ................................................... 5-104
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-77
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-66
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-70
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-83
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-67
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-79
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-89
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-97
Tires (cont.)
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-92
Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-61
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-73
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-74
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-74
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-71
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-54
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-55
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-27
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-54
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-62
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-67
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-62
Traction
Assist System (TAS) ...................................... 4-9
Off Light ..................................................... 3-45
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 4-11
Trailer
Recommendations ....................................... 4-66
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-23
Temperature Gage ....................................... 3-46
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-24
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-38
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
13
U
Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-136
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-73
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-52
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-72
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-106
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-106
Vehicle Personalization
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-61
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-30
Visors ........................................................... 2-17
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-42
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-36
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-60
14
Warnings (cont.)
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-74
Replacement ............................................... 5-74
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-52
Windows ....................................................... 2-15
Manual ...................................................... 2-15
Power ........................................................ 2-16
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ........ 5-102
Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10
Fluid .......................................................... 5-37
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-59
Fuses ...................................................... 5-107
Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-45
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-138
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising